You are on page 1of 315

RN

SERIES

TECHNICAL MANUAL
VERSION 1.0
JULY, 2000

Copyright : 2000 Riso Kagaku Corporation


All Rights Reserved. This Technical Manual was prepared
and written for the exclusive use of RISO International Group
Certified Dealers. Reproduction and/or transmittal of this
material in any form or by any means, including photocopying
or recording of the information is strictly prohibited without the
consent of a member of RISO International Group.

RISO INTERNATIONAL GROUP


RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION (JAPAN) RISO DEUTSCHLAND GMBH (GERMANY)
RISO, INC. (U.S.A.) RISO FRANCE (FRANCE)
RISO EUROPE LIMITED (U.K.) RISO IBERICA (SPAIN)
RISO HONG KONG (HONG KONG) RISO CANADA (CANADA)
RISO UK (U.K.) RISO ZHUHAI (HONG KONG)
RISO THAILAND LIMITED (THAILAND) RISO AFRICA (SOUTH AFRICA)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index

Chapter 1 Maintenance
Chapter 2 Machine Summary
Chapter 3 Machine Drive Section
Chapter 4 First Paper Feed Section
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
Chapter 6 Press Section
Chapter 7 Paper Ejection System
Chapter 8 Print Drum Section
Chapter 9 Master Clamp Section
Chapter 10 Master Removal Section
Chapter 11 F.B. Original Scanning Section
Chapter 12 A.D.F. Original Scanning Section
Chapter 13 Master Making Section
Chapter 14 Timing Charts
Chapter 15 Panel Messages
Chapter 16 Test Modes
Chapter 17 User Mode Settings
Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Precautions
Chapter 19 Description of P.C.B’s

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1: MAINTENANCE

Contents

1. Preface ...................................................................................................................... 1-2


CAUTION ................................................................................................................... 1-3
WARNING ................................................................................................................. 1-4
2. Work Precautions ..................................................................................................... 1-5
3. Exterior Cover Removal ............................................................................................ 1-8
4. Controller (RISORINC2) and System PCB ........................................................... 1-13

1–1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
PREFACE

1. Preface
This manual provides Technical Service Information for the RISOGRAPH model RN series.

This manual is published as a reference guide for use by RISO Group (RISO Kagaku Corp./
RISO,INC./RISO EUROPE Ltd.) Certified Technical Representatives experienced in duplicator repair
and service.

This manual also provides procedures for removing and installing major components. Following these
procedures will minimize machine malfunctions. This information and format will also increase
technical representatives' awareness and experience regarding repairs necessary to insure end-user
satisfaction.

1–2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
CAUTION

CAUTION

[Handling of Lithium Battery]

- Never fail to follow the following instructions when you discard the used
lithium battery.

1. Never let the battery short-circuited.


If the (+) and (-) terminals contact each other or metal materials, the battery will
be short-circuited. If the batteries are collected and stored inorderly or one upon
another, the above-mentioned case will occur.
- DANGER -
If the battery is short-circuited, it will heat up and may in some cases explode into
fire.
2. Never heat up the battery.
- DANGER -
If you heat the battery up to more than 100°C or put it into the fire, it may burn
dangerously or explode.
3. Never disassemble the battery or press it into deformation.
- DANGER -
If you disassemble the battery, the gas pouring out of the inside may hurt your
throat or the negative lithium may heat up into fire.
If the battery is pressed into deformation, the liquid inside may leak out of the
sealed part or the battery may be short-circuited inside an explode.
4. Never fail to keep the battery out of reach of children.
If you put the battery within reach of children, they may swallow it down.
Should they swallow the battery, immediately consult the doctor.

[Replacement of the Lithium Battery]

1. The lithium battery must be replaced by a trained and authorized service


technician.
2. The battery must be replaced only with the same or equivalent type
recom- mended by the manufacturer.
3. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

1–3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
WARNING

!! WARNING !!

Important Safety Precautions

1. Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in the


machine.

I. To avoid injuries:
Be sure to disconnect the electrical power before disassembling, assembling,or when
making adjustments on the machine.

II. Protection of the machine:


Make sure to turn OFF the power to the machine before plugging or unplugging the
electrical connectors, or when connecting a Meter.

2. Always connect electrical connectors firmly.


I. To avoid electrical failure:
The connectors must be connected firmly together and onto the PCBs.
Press on the ends of the connectors and then on the middle to ensure a firm fit.

II. Protection of the electrical components:


The electrical components may be damaged due to short circuits caused by a loose
connector.

Wire harness connector

FIRST

Press the ends.

THEN

Press the center, firmly.

1–4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
WORK PRECAUTIONS

2. Work Precautions
Inspection
If you discover any defects or problems during an inspection, fix the problems or if necessary take
steps such as replacing a part.
Removal
Check the problem area. At the same time, examine the cause of the problem and determine
whether the part needs to be removed or disassembled. Next proceed according to the proce-
dures presented in the Technical Manual. In cases where, for example, it is necessary to disas-
semble areas with large numbers of parts, parts which are similar to each other, or parts which are
the same on the left and right, sort the parts so that you do not mix them up during reassembly.
(1) Carefully sort the removed parts.
(2) Distinguish between parts which are being replaced and those which will be reused.
(3) When replacing screws, etc., be sure to use the
specified sizes.
Assembly and Installation
Unless specified otherwise, perform the removal proce-
dures in reverse during assembly and installation. In
cases where protrusions or holes are provided to assist
in positioning parts, use them for accurate positioning
and securing.
(Protrusions and holes for positioning parts Half
pierce section)
Tools
Using tools other than those specified can lead to injury
or damage screws and parts. Have all the tools neces-
sary for the work available.

<Standard Tool list>

Type Tip size Shaft length, etc. Type Remarks


No. 2 (250 mm) Steel scale 150 mm
No. 2 (100 mm-150 mm)
Phillips screwdriver No. 2 (stubby type) Feeler gauge
No. 1 (75 mm-100 mm) Radial cutting pliers
6 mm (100 mm-150 mm) Pliers
Standard screwdriver 3 mm (100 mm-150 mm)
Nipper
1.8 mm (precision type)
Small flashlight
Nut driver 8 mm (100 mm-150 mm)
(box driver) 7 mm (100 mm-150 mm) Multimeter
High frequency driver 2.5 mm Soldering iron 20 W-30 W
5 mm 5.5 mm 7 mm File Flat, round
Spanners 8 mm 10 mm 13 mm
(may be double-ended) Monkey
5.0 mm
4.0 mm
3.0 mm - ( 2 pieces required )
Hex wrenches 2.5 mm
2.0 mm
1.5 mm

1–5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
WORK PRECAUTIONS

Electrical system work


• After removing wire bundles, fasten them
with wire bundle bands (bar lock ties) so
that they will not sag.
• When installing parts, be careful to avoid
pinching or damaging the wire bundles.
• If a fuse blows, always replace it with one
with the specified capacity. Using a fuse
with a larger capacity can not only dam-
age parts, but may cause fires.
• Be careful not to drop image scanners,
thermal print heads, and other sensors
as they can be easily damaged.

Sensor types
• Photo-electric sensors may be broadly
divided into the following four types: in-
terrupt types (U-shaped), actuator types,
reflective types, and transmittive types.
• Magnetic sensors use Hall ICs, which re-
act to the magnetic force in magnets.
• Always turn off the power before plugging
or unplugging sensor connectors.

Switch types
• Microswitches may be divided between nor-
mally open (NO) types and normally closed
(NC) types.
With an NO connection, an internal con-
tact is connected when the switch actua-
tor is pressed.
With an NC connection, an internal con-
tact is disconnected when the switch ac-
tuator is pressed.
• Magnetic lead switches are switches in
which an internal contact is connected
in reaction to the magnetic force of a
magnet.

1–6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
WORK PRECAUTIONS

Installation location
• Do not install the machine in any of the following locations.
(1) Those subject to direct sunlight or any bright location such as by a window (If you must
install in such a location, put a curtain or the like over the window.)
(2) Those where the temperature changes drastically
(3) Those that are too hot, cold, humid, or dry
RECOMMENDED:
Temperature range: 15° centigrade - 30° centigrade
Humidity range: 40% - 70% No condensation allowed
(4) Those with radiant heat sources and any locations in the direct path of air from air condition-
ers, heaters
(5) Any poorly ventilated location
(6) Dusty atmosphere
(7) Any tilted location
(Installation height difference: 10 mm max. front - rear, 10 mm max. left - right)

Electrical connection
• Plug the plug securely into the socket so that there is no problem with the contact in the power
supply plug section.
• Do not use any triplets or extension cords.
• Do not allow any other machine to stand on or crush the power cord.

Ground connection
• Always ground this machine to prevent electrical shock in the unlikely event of electrical
leakage.

1–7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

3. Exterior Cover Removal


1. Bring the Print Cylinder to Position-A and remove the Print Cylinder from the machine.
2. Turn off the power and remove the power cord from the machine.

FRONT COVER
Remove mounting screws (M4x8: 2 pcs) from the Hinge, and remove the Hinge.
The Front Cover comes off the machine.

Front cover Hinge

FRONT FRAME COVER


Remove mounting screws (M4x8: 7 pcs) and remove the Front Frame Cover.

Front frame cover

1–8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

REAR COVER
Remove mounting screws (M3x5: 2pcs) of the Connector Lock of the Controller and open the
Connector Locks flat against the Controller.
Remove screws (M4x8: 4 pcs) and remove the Rear Cover.

Connector lock

Rear cover

MASTER REMOVAL LOWER COVER


Remove the Master Disposal Box.
Remove screws (M4x8: 4 pcs) and remove the Master Removal Lower Cover.

Master removal lower cover

1–9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

STAGE COVER
Remove mounting screw (M4x10: 1 pc) from each of the two Hinges of the Stage Cover, and then as
shown on the photograph, attach those screws in the secrew holes behind.
Remove screw (M4x8: 1 pc) on the Scanner Unit Cover (rear) to detach the Ground Wire from the
machine, and then lift the Stage Cover off the machine.

Stage cover

Ground wire

Hinge Scanner Unit Cover (rear)

1 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

SCANNER UNIT COVER (LEFT)


Remove mounting screw (M4x8: 4 pcs) and remove the Scanner Unit Cover (left).

Scanner unit cover (left)

SCANNER UNIT COVER (REAR)


Remove the Stage Cover.
Remove mounting screw (M4x8: 4 pcs) and remove the Scanner Unit Cover (rear).

Scanner unit cover (rear)

1 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

SCANNER UNIT COVER (FRONT)


Remove mounting screw (M4x8: 3 pcs) and remove the Scanner Unit Cover (front).

Scanner unit cover (front)

SCANNER UNIT COVER (RIGHT)


Remove Scanner Unit Cover (front) and Scanner Unit Cover (rear).
Remove mounting screw (M4x8: 2 pcs) and remove the Scanner Unit Cover (right).

Scanner unit cover (right)

1 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

4. Controller (RISORINC2) and SYSTEM PCB

CONTROLLER (RISORINC2)
Remove the Rear Cover.
Disconnect three connectors from the Controller (1 on the top and 2 on the bottom of the Controller).
Remove screws (M3x6: 2 pcs), and pull the Controller a little bit to the front, just enough to clear the
half-pierce, and slide the Controller out of the machine.

Half-pierce

Controller
(RISORINC2)

System PCB support bracket A

[Precautions on Reassembly]
Place the Controller on top of the System PCB Support Bracket A, and push it in.

1 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

SYSTEM PCB
Remove the Rear Cover.
Remove screws (M3x5: 1 pc), and remove the Wire Harness Support Plate.
Disconnect all the Connectors from the System PCB, remove screws (M3x5: 6 pcs), and then remove
the System PCB together with the System PCB Support Bracket B.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
Attach the Wire Harness Support Plate while pushing it down against the wire harness (flat cable) to
hold the wire harness firmly in position.

Wire harness support plate

Flat cable (wire harness)

1 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE
EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

SYSTEM PCB SUPPORT BRACKET A


Unplug the connector of the FB Junction Wire Harness from the Junction COnnector, and then detach
the Junction Connector from the System PCB Support Bracket A.
Remove seven Snap Bands from the System PCB Support Bracket A.
Remove screws (M4x6: 5 pcs) and detach the System PCB Support Bracket from the machine.

Snap band Junction Connector FB Junction Wire Harness

System PCB support bracket A

Snap band

Snap band

1 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

[Memo]

1 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 2: MACHINE SUMMARY

Contents

1. Specifications (Metric Model) .................................................................................... 1-2


2. Specifications (Inch Model) ...................................................................................... 1-6

2–1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY
SPECIFICATIONS (METRIC MODEL)

1. Specifications (Metric Model)


Reference only

2–2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY
SPECIFICATIONS (METRIC MODEL)

Reference only

2–3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY
SPECIFICATIONS (METRIC MODEL)

Reference only

2–4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY
SPECIFICATIONS (METRIC MODEL)

Reference only

2–5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY
SPECIFICATIONS (INCH MODEL)

2. Specifications (Inch Model)


Reference only
Not available to U.S.A.
(U.S.A. has RN2000 designed only for Letter size)

2–6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY
SPECIFICATIONS (INCH MODEL)

Reference only

2–7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3: MAIN DRIVE SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 3-2


1. Main Drive Section .................................................................................................... 3-2
2. Main Motor Safety Mechanism .................................................................................. 3-3
3. Print Drum Position Check Mechanism ................................................................... 3-4
Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................ 3-6
1. Removing the Main Motor Unit .................................................................................. 3-6
2. Removing the Flat Bed Set Switch ........................................................................... 3-8
3. Removing the Print Drum Safety Switch ................................................................... 3-9
Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 3-10
1. Print Drum Position-A Adjustment ......................................................................... 3-10

3–1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION
MAIN DRIVE SECTION

Mechanism
1. Main Drive Section
When the Main motor [A] is turned on, the Main pulley [B] rotates and the rotation is transmitted to the Print
drum pulley [D] via the Main belt [C].
The Main motor encoder sensor [E] detects the speed and position of the main motor [A].

A
A: Main motor
B: Main pulley
C: Main belt
D: Print drum pulley
E: Main motor encoder sensor

–3 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION
MAIN MOTOR SAFETY MECHANISM

2. Main Motor Safety Mechanism


Two safety switches (Flat bed set switch [A] and Print drum safety switch [B]) prevent the motor from being
turned on if parts are not positioned.

A: Flat bed set switch


B: Print drum safety switch

3–3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION
PRINT DRUM POSITION CHECK MECHANISM

3. Print Drum Position Check Mechanism


The print drum’s rotation position is detected by the Main motor encoder sensor referenced to the position
A detected by the Position A sensor [A] on the machine and Position A detection plate [B] on the print
drum.
The encoder counts 2933 pulses for each revolution of the print drum.

A: Position A sensor
B: Position A detection plate

3–4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

[Memo]

3–5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION
REMOVING THE MAIN MOTOR UNIT

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Main Motor Unit
(1) Position the print drum at position A, turn off the power, and then remove the following covers and
components.
• Front door
• Front cover
• Rear cover
• Controller
• Main PCB
• Print positioning unit
(2) Reduce the tension on the Paper feed timing belt [A].
• Loosen the retaining screws on the Idler A ass’y [B].
(3) Reduce the tension on the Main belt [C].
• Loosen the retaining screws on the Idler B ass’y [D].
• Loosen the retaining screw [L] on the Idler C ass’y [E], and then remove the mounting screw [M].
* Do not remove the retaining screw [L] on the Idler C ass’y [E].
(4) Remove the Paper feed timing belt [A] and Main belt [C] from the Main pulley [F].
(5) Unplug one wire harness connector from slot No. CN403 of the Drive PCB, and another wire harness
connector at the rear of the machine, close to the Print positioning unit. Then remove the mounting
screws (M4 x 8: 6 pcs), and remove the Main motor unit [G].

C
F
G

3–6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION
REMOVING THE MAIN MOTOR UNIT

L M E I H

Main motor unit

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Tension the main belt by aligning the position-A alignment hole [J] on the print drum with the main-
pulley position-A alignment hole [K] and then turning the Idler C ass’y [E] counter-clockwise to apply
tension on the Main belt [C] and lock its position. Apply further tension on the Main belt [C] by turning
the Idler B ass’y [D] clockwise.

D
E

A: Paper feed timing belt


B: Idler A ass’y
C: Main belt
D: Idler B ass’y
E: Idler C ass’y
F: Main pulley
G: Main motor unit
H: Main motor encoder sensor
I: Main motor
J: Print drum pulley “position-A” alignment hole
K: Main-pulley position-A alignment hole
L: Idler C ass’y retaining screw
K
M: Idler C ass’y mounting screw

3–7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION
REMOVING THE FLAT BED SET SWITCH

2. Removing the Flat Bed Set Switch


(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the covers.
• Front door
• Front cover
(2) Unplug the connector [C], remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs), and then remove the entire
Flat bed set switch cover [A].
(3) Remove the E-ring, remove the Torsion spring [E], and then remove the Flat bed set switch [B]
together with the sensor bracket [D].
(4) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 14: 2 pcs) and remove the Flat bed set switch [B].

D B

A: Flat bed set switch cover


B: Flat bed set switch
C: Connector
D: Sensor bracket
E: Torsion spring

3–8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SAFETY SWITCH

3. Removing the Print Drum Safety Switch


(1) Pull out the print drum.
(2) Remove the covers.
• Front door
• Front cover
(3) Remove the Print drum safety switch cover [B]. (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)
(4) Unplug the Connector [C], remove the mounting screws (M3 x 14: 2 pcs), and then remove the Print
drum safety switch [A].

B A

A: Print drum safety switch


B: Print drum safety switch cover
C: Connector

3–9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION
PRINT DRUM POSITION-A ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment
1. Print Drum Position-A Adjustment
Checking and adjustment procedure
(1) Pull out the print drum and return it back after removing the master attached to it.
(2) Open the Scanner table.
(3) Start the test mode, and run test mode No. 551 (set drum to position-A).
(4) Open the Master disposal gate housing, press down the Clamp open arm plate by hand, and
check that it slots smoothly into the groove in the position-A Compensator plate without the print
drum moving.
(5) If it does not slot smoothly into the position-A Compensator plate or if the print drum moves, run
test mode No. 581 (position-A adjustment) to adjust position-A for the print drum. (On the setting
procedure, refer to Chapter 16: Test Mode.)
(6) Repeat from step (3) until correct print drum position-A is achieved.

3 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4: FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 4-2


1. Paper Feed Tray Mechanism ................................................................................... 4-2
2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism ................................................................... 4-3
3. Paper Feed Tray Safety Mechanism ......................................................................... 4-4
4. First Paper Feed Drive Mechanism .......................................................................... 4-5
5. Paper Strip Mechanism ............................................................................................ 4-6
6. Paper Feed Pressure Adjust Lever .......................................................................... 4-7
Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................ 4-9
1. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit ........................................................................ 4-9
2. Removing the Paper Width Potentiometer, Paper Detection
Sensor, and Paper Size Detection Sensor ............................................................ 4-10
3. Removing the Pickup and Scraper Rollers ........................................................... 4-12
4. Removing the Feed Tray Descent Button and Upper Limit Sensor ..................... 4-13
5. Removing the Paper Feed Clutch ......................................................................... 4-14
6. Removing the Pickup Roller Shaft Ass’y ............................................................... 4-15
7. Removing the Elevator Motor ................................................................................. 4-16
8. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch ........................................... 4-17
9. Removing the Stripper Unit ................................................................................... 4-18
10. Removing the Stripper Pad Ass’y .......................................................................... 4-19
Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 4-20
1. Upper Limit Sensor Position Adjustment ............................................................. 4-20
2. Stripper Unit Adjustment ........................................................................................ 4-21
3. Paper-Feed Clutch “ON” Timing Adjustment ........................................................ 4-22
4. Paper-Feed Clutch “OFF” Timing Adjustment ....................................................... 4-22

4–1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
PAPER FEED TRAY MECHANISM

Mechanism
1. Paper Feed Tray Mechanism
1) Horizontal positioning (horizontal print positioning) of the paper feed tray
The Paper feed tray [A] can be moved ±10 mm left or right by turning the Adjustment dial [B] manually
(for paper widths up to 274 mm, and ±5 mm for paper widths between 275 mm and 290 mm).

2) Print paper size detection


The Paper feed tray [A] uses the Paper width potentiometer [D] and Paper size detection sensor [C] to
determine the size of the paper loaded in the Paper feed tray [A].
The Paper width potentiometer [D] checks the paper width, and the Paper size detection sensor [C]
determines the paper length (portrait or landscape orientation).

A
B

A: Paper feed tray


B: Adjustment dial
C: Paper size detection sensor
D: Paper width potentiometer
View of underside of the paper feed tray
with the cover off

4–2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
PAPER FEED TRAY ELEVATION MECHANISM

2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism


The presence of paper loaded in the Paper feed tray [A] is detected by the Paper detection sensor [B].
When light is received at the Paper detection sensor [B] (paper present), pressing the START key
activates the Elevator motor [E] and raises the Paper feed tray [A] until the Scraper assembly [C] blocks
the light beam of the Upper limit sensor [D].
During printing, the Elevator motor [E] is activated until the light to the upper limit sensor [D] is blocked.
When there is no longer paper in the Paper feed tray [A] and light is not received by the Paper detection
sensor [B], the Elevator motor [E] activates and lowers the Paper feed tray [A] until the light beam of the
Lower limit sensor [F] is blocked.
If the Feed tray descent button [G] is pressed while in print standby mode, the Elevator motor [E] activates
and lowers the Paper feed tray [A] until either the light beam of the Lower limit sensor [F] is blocked or the
Feed tray descent button [G] is pressed once again.
The Elevator motor [E] does not operate even if the Feed tray descent button [G] is pressed while the print
drum is removed.

C G D

A B F
A: Paper feed tray
B: Paper detection sensor
C: Scraper assembly
D: Upper limit sensor
E: Elevator motor
F: Lower limit sensor
G: Feed tray descent button

4–3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
PAPER FEED TRAY SAFETY MECHANISM

3. Paper Feed Tray Safety Mechanism


The Paper feed tray lower safety switch [C] ensures safety while the paper feed tray is being raised or
lowered or is stationary.
If the Safety switch actuator plate [B] is depressed, the Paper feed tray lower safety switch [C] trips. An
error in the paper feed tray is then assumed, and the machine stops.

Press

A: Paper feed tray


B: Safety switch actuator plate
C: Paper feed tray lower safety switch

4–4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
FIRST PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM

4. First Paper Feed Drive Mechanism


When the printing operation commences, the Main motor [A] activates to rotate the print drum via the Main
belt [C]. When the Main motor [A] is running, the Paper feed timing belt [D] continuously drives the pulley
on the Paper feed clutch [E].
When the print drum rotates through a preset angle (the angle set for paper feed clutch activation by test
mode No. 481) from position A, the Paper feed clutch [E] is activated. The Scraper roller [G] and Pickup
roller [H] rotate to feed the paper inside the machine from the paper feed tray.
The paper fed inside the machine blocks the light beam between Paper sensors [I] and [L]. The print
drum then rotates through a preset angle (the angle set for paper feed clutch deactivation angle
adjustment by test mode Nos. 482 to 485), and the Paper feed clutch [E] is deactivated, completing the
first stage paper feed.
The leading edge of the paper rests against the Guide roller [J] and Timing roller [M] and stops with the
paper bulging.
If the print drum rotates as far as the first paper feed jam detection angle after the Paper feed clutch [E]
has been activated, Paper sensors [I] and [L] check to detect the presence or absence of paper.
After the paper has been fed to the second paper feed stage, a one-way clutch acts on the Scraper roller
[G] and Pickup roller [H] so that they spin, to prevent the first paper feed area from applying brake on the
paper.

E
C

A: Main motor
G H I J
B: Main pulley
C: Main belt
D: Paper feed timing belt
E: Paper feed clutch
F: Pickup roller shaft
G: Scraper roller
H: Pickup roller
I: Paper sensor (receive)
J: Guide roller
K: Stripper pad
L: Paper sensor (send)
M: Timing roller K L M

4–5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
PAPER STRIP MECHANISM

5. Paper Strip Mechanism


The paper loaded in the paper feed tray is fed in between the Pickup roller [A] and Stripper pad [B] by the
rotating scraper roller. The paper is then separated by the Pickup roller [A] and Stripper pad [B] to ensure
that only the uppermost sheet is sent into the machine.
The Stripper pad [B] is pressed against the Pickup roller [A] by the force of the Stripper spring [C], and the
resistance applied to the paper fed in separates the sheet.
The stripper-pad angle and stripping pressure can be adjusted by the user using the Stripper pad angle
adjust knob [D] and Stripper pressure adjust knob[E].

A Stripper pad angle adjust knob

Stripper pressure adjust knob

A: Pickup roller
B: Stripper pad
C: Stripper spring
D: Stripper pad angle adjust knob
E: Stripper pressure adjust knob

4–6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
PAPER FEED PRESSURE ADJUST LEVER

6. Paper Feed Pressure Adjust Lever


The Paper feed pressure adjust lever [A] is located on the left-hand side of the scraper unit, and moving
this to the left or right switches the scraper-roller paper-feed pressure (scraper pressure) from NORMAL
(weak) and CARD (strong).
Moving the pressure adjust lever to the right increases the paper-feed pressure (scraper pressure).

A B C D

A: Pressure adjust lever


B: Pressure adjust lever spring
C: Pressure arm spring
D: Pressure arm

4–7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

[Memo]

4–8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PAPER FEED TRAY UNIT

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit
(1) Lower the Paper feed tray [F] fully.
(2) Remove the rear cover.
(3) Unplug the connector [A] on the wire harness [B] from the Paper feed tray [F]. Remove the mounting
screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc) and remove the ground screw [D]. Cut the wire harness band [C], and then pull
the wire harness [B] towards the paper feed tray.
(4) Remove the E-rings [E] from the mountings on both sides of the paper feed tray, and remove the
Paper feed tray [F].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• The wire harness on the paper feed tray must be secured with the harness band as before.
• Do not forget to attach the ground wire.

A B C D E E

A: Connector
B: Wire harness
C: Wire harness band
D: Ground screw
E: E-ring
F: Paper feed tray

4–9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PAPER WIDTH POTENTIOMETER, PAPER DETECTION SENSOR, AND PAPER SIZE DETECTION SENSOR

2. Removing the Paper Width Potentiometer, Paper Detection


Sensor, and Paper Size Detection Sensor
(1) Remove the paper feed tray unit.
(2) Remove the E-ring and remove the Adjustment dial [A].
(3) Remove the E-rings [C] and bearings from both sides of the Slide shaft [B].
(4) Remove the shoulder screws (2 pcs) [D] and remove the paper-feed mounting plate [E].
(5) Remove the Paper-feed-tray bottom front cover [F] (mounting screws M4 x 6: 4 pcs) and Paper-feed-
tray bottom rear cover [G] (mounting screws M3 x 8: 3 pcs).
(6) Unplug the connector and remove the Paper detection sensor [H] while expanding the mounting
clips.
(7) Unplug the connector and remove the Paper size detection sensor [I] while expanding the mounting
clips.
(8) Remove the mounting screws (mounting screws M3 x 8: 3 pcs), unplug the connector, and then
remove the Paper width potentiometer [K] together with the Potentiometer base [J].

A
C

A: Adjustment dial F: Paper-feed-tray bottom front cover J: Potentiometer base


B: Slide shaft G: Paper-feed-tray bottom rear cover K: Paper width potentiometer
C: Bearing H: Paper detection sensor L: Spur gear
D: Shoulder screw I: Paper size detection sensor M: Potentiometer shaft
E: Paper-feed mounting plate

4 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PAPER WIDTH POTENTIOMETER, PAPER DETECTION SENSOR, AND PAPER SIZE DETECTION SENSOR

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• With the fence opened fully, mount the Spur gear [L] and the flat face of the potentiometer shaft [M]
facing the printer body. (See photograph below.)
• Start test mode, and first set the fence position to 105 mm and activate test mode No. 450 (potenti-
ometer adjustment 105 mm). Next, set the fence position to 210 mm and activate test mode No.
451 (potentiometer adjustment 210 mm).
• After adjusting the potentiometer, check that each paper size is correctly detected.

Printer main body side


Printer main body side

Flat face of
M the shaft

4 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PICKUP AND SCRAPER ROLLERS

3. Removing the Pickup and Scraper Rollers


Removing the Scraper roller
(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully and switch off the power.
(2) Remove the Lock ring [E] on the Scraper roller shaft [C].
(3) Slide the Scraper roller [D] off the Scraper roller shaft [C].

Removing the Pickup roller


(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully and switch off the power.
(2) Remove the Lock ring [E] on the Pickup roller shaft [A].
(3) Slide the Pickup roller [B] off the Pickup roller shaft [A].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• The scraper and pickup roller contain a one-way clutch. If mounted in the opposite direction, the
rollers will not rotate even when the pickup roller shaft rotates. When mounted on the shafts
correctly, the rollers spin freely in the direction shown on the diagram below when rotated manually.

A
B

A: Pickup roller shaft


B: Pickup roller
C: Scraper roller shaft
D: Scraper roller
E: Lock ring

4 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE FEED TRAY DESCENT BUTTON AND UPPER LIMIT SENSOR

4. Removing the Feed Tray Descent Button and Upper Limit Sensor
(1) Remove the Master-removal lower cover. (mounting screws M4 x 8: 4 pcs)
(2) Unplug connector [A], remove the mounting screw (M4 x 8: 1 pc), and then remove the Upper limit
sensor [B] together with the Upper limit sensor bracket [C].
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), unplug the connector [D], and then remove the Feed tray
descent button [E] together with its mounting bracket [F].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Adjust the position of the upper limit sensor.

A B C D E F

A: Upper limit sensor connector


B: Upper limit sensor
C: Upper limit sensor bracket
D: Feed tray descent button connector
E: Feed tray descent button
F: Mounting bracket

4 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PAPER FEED CLUTCH

5. Removing the Paper Feed Clutch


(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Loosen the retaining screw [C] on the Paper timing belt tension bracket [B], and reduce the tension
on the Paper feed timing belt [E].
(3) Unplug the connector [F], remove the E-ring, and remove the Paper feed clutch [D].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Align the flat face of the Pickup roller shaft [G] with that on the Paper feed clutch [D].
• Engage the slot [H] on the clutch with the clutch lock plate [I] on the machine to prevent the paper
feed clutch unit from rotating.

E D

B
A

D
G

A: Timing gear
H
B: Timing belt tension bracket
C: Retaining screw
D: Paper feed clutch
E: Paper feed timing belt
F: Connector
G: Pickup roller shaft
H: Paper feed clutch slot
I: Clutch lock plate I

4 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PICKUP ROLLER SHAFT ASS’Y

6. Removing the Pickup Roller Shaft Ass’y


(1) Remove the covers.
• Rear cover
• Master-removal lower cover
(2) Remove the pickup and scraper rollers.
(3) Remove the upper limit sensor.
(4) Remove the paper feed clutch.
(5) Remove the E-rings and bearing bushes [A] on either end of the Pickup roller shaft.
(6) Remove the mounting screw (4 x 8: 1 pc) on the shaft bracket [B], remove the bracket, and then
remove the Pickup roller shaft ass’y [C] towards you.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Adjust the position of the upper limit sensor.

A: Bearing bush
B: Shaft bracket
C: Pickup roller shaft ass’y

4 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE ELEVATOR MOTOR

7. Removing the Elevator Motor


(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully, switch off the power, and pull out the print drum.
(2) Remove the covers.
• Front door
• Front cover
• Master-removal lower cover
(3) Squeeze the wire harness band [E] from the inside, detach from the side frame, and then unplug the
two connectors [F] of the Master removal unit.
(4) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 4 pcs), and hang free the Drive PCB [A] together with its
mounting bracket.
(5) Remove the Elevator springs [G] from both sides of the Paper feed tray to prevent the tray from
springing up.
(6) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), unplug the connector [D] of the Elevator motor [B], and
remove the Elevator motor [B].

E F

C D

A: Drive PCB D: Connector of elevator motor F: Connector of master removal unit


B: Elevator motor E: Wire harness band G: Elevator spring
C: Mounting screw
4 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PAPER FEED TRAY LOWER SAFETY SWITCH

8. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch


(1) Remove the screws (Shoulder screw, M4 x 30: 2 pcs), securing the printer to the Risograph stand.
(2) Remove the rear cover.
(3) Slide out the machine from the Risograph stand (in the direction shown by the arrow in the
photograph) far enough to allow a screwdriver to be inserted in the mounting screws on the Grip
handle [A]. Make sure that the rubber feet do not slip off the Risograph stand.
(4) From underneath the machine, remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), and remove the Grip
handle [A].
(5) Unplug the top connector [B].
(6) Unplug the bottom connector [C] from the stay [D].
(7) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 14: 2 pcs), and remove the Paper feed tray lower safety switch
[E].

D B

A: Grip andle
B: Top connector
C: Bottom connector
D: Stay
E: Paper feed tray lower safety
switch

4 – 17
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE STRIPPER UNIT

9. Removing the Stripper Unit


(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully.
(2) Place a finger on the top of the Stripper unit [A] and pull it forward to remove it.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Set the Stripper pad ass’y [B] in the Paper guide plate [C] while it is pushed down.
• Adjust the stripper pressure and stripper angle.

Hold here and pull forward.

A
A: Stripper unit
B: Stripper pad ass’y
C: Paper guide plate

4 – 18
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE STRIPPER PAD ASS’Y

10. Removing the Stripper Pad Ass’y


(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully, and remove the stripper unit.
(2) Lift up the Stripper pad ass’y [A] by hand and remove it.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Attach the Stripper pad [B] by pushing the face indicated by arrow against the face indicated by arrow
on the Stripper pad base [C].

B
C

A: Stripper pad ass’y


B: Stripper pad
C: Stripper pad base
D: Stripper pad cover

4 – 19
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
UPPER LIMIT SENSOR POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment
1. Upper Limit Sensor Position Adjustment
Procedure
(1) Remove the paper on the paper feed tray.
(2) Start test mode No. 453 (elevator servo) and raise the paper feed tray and bringing it to a
complete stop.
(3) Once it is stopped, check that the gap between the Pickup roller [C] and the Paper feed tray [E] is
1.0 mm ±0.3 mm.
(4) If the gap is not within the specifications, detach the master removal box and remove the Master-
removal lower cover.
(5) Loosen the mounting screw [B] on the Upper limit sensor bracket [A], and adjust by sliding the
upper limit sensor up or down.
Symptoms
If the upper limit sensor is positioned too high, the paper-feed pressure is increased and multiple sheet
feeding is more likely to arise.
Conversely, if it is positioned too low, the paper-feed pressure is reduced and non-feeding is more likely
to arise.

C D
1.0 ±0.3

A: Upper limit sensor bracket


B: Upper limit sensor bracket mounting screw
C: Pickup roller
D: Scraper roller
E: Paper feed tray

4 – 20
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
STRIPPER UNIT ADJUSTMENT

2. Stripper Unit Adjustment


Procedure
(1) Slide the Paper feed pressure adjust lever to suit the paper type before printing.
(2) If multiple feeding or non-feeding occurs, adjust the stripper-pad angle and pressure.

1) Multiple feeding
• Turn the Stripper pad angle adjust knob [A] clockwise to increase the stripper-pad angle (raise the
pad more vertically).
• Turn the Stripper pressure adjust knob [B] clockwise to increase the stripper pressure.
2) Non-feeding
• Turn the Stripper pad angle adjust knob [A] counter-clockwise to reduce the stripper-pad angle
(lower the pad more horizontally).
• Turn the Stripper pressure adjust knob [B] counter-clockwise to reduce the stripper pressure.

Normal (24 degrees)

Adjustable
from 14
degrees to
28 degrees
A
Reduced angle Increased angle

Stronger

Normal Weaker

Strong Weak

A: Stripper pad angle adjust knob


B: Stripper pressure adjust knob

4 – 21
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION
PAPER-FEED CLUTCH “ON” TIMING ADJUSTMENT

3. Paper-Feed Clutch “ON” Timing Adjustment


Check and adjustment procedure
(1) Test print to check that paper is fed smoothly.
(2) If the first stage paper feed timing is not synchronized, adjust using test mode No. 481 (paper-
feed-clutch activation drum angle adjustment). (For the setting procedure, refer to Chapter 16:
Test Modes.)
(3) Repeat from step (1) until correct timing is achieved.

Symptoms
If the first stage paper feed timing is not synchronized, paper jamming or inconsistent print registration
may occur.

4. Paper-Feed Clutch “OFF” Timing Adjustment


Check and adjustment procedure
(1) Test print to check that printing is performed smoothly.
(2) If the paper is excessively or insufficiently buckled and printing is not performed smoothly, run test
modes No. 482–485 (paper-feed-clutch deactivation drum angle adjustment) according to the
user’s paper selection setting. (For the setting procedure, refer to Chapter 16: Test Modes.)
(3) Repeat from step (1) until correct timing is achieved.

Symptoms
If the paper is excessively or insufficiently buckled, paper may not be fed to the second stage and paper
jamming may occur.

4 – 22
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5: SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 5-2


1. Second Paper Feed Mechanism .............................................................................. 5-2
2. Vertical Print Positioning Mechanism ....................................................................... 5-4
Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................ 5-6
1. Removing the Guide Roller Ass’y ............................................................................ 5-6
2. Removing the Paper Guide Plate Ass’y ................................................................... 5-7
3. Removing the Paper Sensor .................................................................................... 5-9
4. Removing the Timing Roller .................................................................................. 5-10
5. Removing the Print-Positioning Unit ..................................................................... 5-12
6. Removing the Vertical Centering Sensor .............................................................. 5-13
7. Removing the Print-Positioning Pulse Motor ........................................................ 5-14
8. Removing the Timing Gear ................................................................................... 5-15
Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 5-16
1. Timing Cam Mounting Position ............................................................................. 5-16

5–1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
SECOND PAPER FEED MECHANISM

Mechanism
1. Second Paper Feed Mechanism
When the main motor operates during printing, the Main cam [A] rotates clockwise.
The Main cam [A] rotation moves the Timing gear [C] via the Cam follower arm [B], and this rotates the
Timing cam [D].
The Timing cam [D] contains a one-way clutch, so that when it rotates counter-clockwise, the rotation is
transferred to the Timing roller [G], but when it rotates clockwise, the rotation is not transferred.
The Load spring [H] continuously applies a load to the Timing roller [G] to ensure that the Timing roller [G]
stops immediately when it is not rotated.
The Timing roller [G] rotation also rotates the Guide roller [F] clockwise.
As the Timing cam [D] rotates, the protrusion pushes against the Timing lever [E] and raises the Guide
roller [F].
During printing, the Guide roller [F] moves down and contacts the Timing roller [G] during the first paper
feed operation, and then rises once the Timing roller [G] stops rotating.

F H

B C G
A: Main cam
B: Cam follower arm
C: Timing gear
D: Timing cam
E: Timing lever
F: Guide roller
G: Timing roller
H: Load spring

–5 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
SECOND PAPER FEED MECHANISM

Drum Position-A D
At Drum position-A, the protrusion
on the Timing cam [B] pushes C
against the Timing lever [C] to
raise the Guide roller [D].

B F

E
A

First paper feed start


When the first paper feed starts
and the paper is fed in, the Timing
gear [E] is rotated in the direction,
indicated by arrow mark, by the
Main cam [A]. This rotates the
Timing cam [B], which lowers the
Timing lever [C] to lower the
Guide roller [D].

Second paper feed start


When the first paper feed ends,
the Timing gear [E] is rotated by
the Main cam [A] in the direction
indicated by the arrow mark. This
rotates the Timing cam [B] and
also causes the timing roller [D]
to rotate, feeding the paper. (The
Guide roller [D] rotates on contact
with the Timing roller [F].)

A: Main cam
B: Timing cam
C: Timing lever
D: Guide roller
E: Timing gear
F: Timing roller

5–3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
VERTICAL PRINT POSITIONING MECHANISM

2. Vertical Print Positioning Mechanism


Pressing the < > or < > print position keys on the panel activates the Print positioning pulse motor [A],
which rotates the Print positioning adjuster cam [B] to move the Print positioning plate ass’y [C].
The Print positioning plate ass’y [C] motion moves the Print positioning lever ass’y [E], changing the
timing with the main cam.
The second paper feed (timing roller rotation start) timing is thus changed, changing the vertical printing
position.
The Vertical centering sensor [D] checks the centering of the print positioning.

C B A

A: Print-positioning pulse motor


B: Print-positioning cam (with the spiral groove on its back side)
C: Print-positioning plate ass’y
D: Vertical centering sensor
E: Print-positioning lever ass’y

5–4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
VERTICAL PRINT POSITIONING MECHANISM

1) Pressing the < > (up) key on the panel

When the < > key is pressed, the print-


positioning adjuster cam [C] and print-
positioning adjuster plate ass’y [B] move in the
directions indicated by arrows.
A The movement of the Print-positioning plate
D ass’y [B] also moves the Print-positioning lever
ass’y [D], and the bearing [E] in contact with the
B Main cam [A] moves in the direction indicated
by arrows.
The timing of the contact of the bearing [E]
against the Main cam [A] is delayed, causing
the second paper feed timing to delay, and
moves the print position up.

C
E

2) Pressing the < > (down) key on the panel

D When the < > key is pressed, the Print-


positioning cam [C] and Print-positioning plate
ass’y [B] move in the directions indicated by
A arrows.
The movement of the Print-positioning plate
ass’y [B] also moves the Print-positioning lever
B ass’y [D], and the bearing [E] in contact with the
Main cam [A] moves in the direction indicated
by arrows.
The timing of the contact of the bearing [E]
against the Main cam [A] is advanced, causing
the second paper feed timing to advance, and
moves the print position down.

E
C

A: Main cam
B: Print-positioning plate ass’y
C: Print-positioning cam
D: Print-positioning lever ass’y
E: Bearing

5–5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Guide Roller Ass’y
(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the following covers.
• Front door
• Front cover
• Rear cover
(2) Unplug the three connectors and remove the controller. (mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs)
(3) Remove the Guide roller spring [A].
(4) Remove the Timing lever ass’y [B]. (mounting screws M4 x 8: 1 pc)
(5) Remove the E-rings [C] and bearing bushes [D] at both front and rear, and then remove the Guide
roller ass’y [E].

A: Guide roller spring


B: Timing lever ass’y
C: E-ring
D: Bearing bush
E: Guide roller ass’y

5–6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PAPER GUIDE PLATE ASS’Y

2. Removing the Paper Guide Plate Ass’y


(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the following covers.
• Front door
• Front cover
• Rear cover
• Master-removal lower cover
(2) Remove the following components.
• Paper feed tray unit
• Stripper unit
• Paper feed clutch
• Pickup roller shaft ass’y
• Elevator motor
• Guide roller ass’y
(3) Unplug the connectors from the Main PCB and remove the Main PCB together with its mounting
bracket. (mounting screws M3 x 6: 5 pcs)
(4) Loosen the retaining screws, and remove Guard plate F [A] and Guard plate R [B].
(5) Remove Elevator rack front [C] and Elevator rack rear [D]. (mounting screws M4 x 8: 4 pcs each)

B A

D
C

A: Guard plate F
B: Guard plate R
C: Elevator rack front
D: Elevator rack rear

5–7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PAPER GUIDE PLATE ASS’Y

(6) Unplug the connector from the Paper guide plate [A], remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 7 pcs),
and then remove the Paper guide plate [A].

B A

Enlarged view

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Hook the Paper guide plate [A] onto the timing roller bearing bushes [B]. (See enlarged view.)
• Align the half-pierced sections of the front and rear elevator racks.
• Align the gear height for the front and rear elevator racks.

• Raise the front and rear


elevator racks fully to
disengage the gears,
and then lower them
while aligning the
height.

A: Paper guide plate


B: Bearing bush

5–8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PAPER SENSOR

3. Removing the Paper Sensor


(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the following covers.
• Front door
• Front cover
• Rear cover
• Master-removal lower cover
(2) Remove the following components.
• Paper feed tray unit
• Stripper unit
• Paper feed clutch
• Pickup roller shaft ass’y
• Elevator motor
• Guide roller ass’y
• Paper guide plate
(3) Unplug the Paper sensor connector [A] from the Paper guide plate [F].
(4) Remove the Paper sensor (send) [B] mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc) and Paper sensor (receive) [C]
mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc), remove the Paper-sensor covers [D] and [E], and then remove Paper
sensors [B] and [C] from the Paper guide plate [F].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Hook the Paper sensors onto the retaining brackets of the Paper guide plate.

A E C

A: Connector
B: Paper sensor (send) D
C: Paper sensor (receive)
D: Paper-sensor cover (send)
E: Paper-sensor cover (receive) B
F: Paper guide plate

5–9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE TIMING ROLLER

4. Removing the Timing Roller


(1) Remove the following covers.
• Front door
• Front cover
• Rear cover
• Master-removal lower cover
(2) Remove the following components.
• Paper feed tray unit
• Stripper unit
• Paper feed clutch
• Pickup roller shaft ass’y
• Elevator motor
• Guide roller ass’y
• Paper guide plate
(3) Remove the E-ring from the rear of the Timing roller [A], then remove the Timing cam [B].
(4) Remove the E-ring and collar [C] from the front of the Timing roller [A], then remove the Load spring
[D].
(5) Remove the E-rings and bearing bushes [E] from both ends of the Timing roller [A], and then remove
the Timing roller [A].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Note the direction in which the load spring is mounted. (See diagram.)

[Adjustment after Reassembly]


• Adjust the timing cam mounting position.

B A

5 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE TIMING ROLLER

Load spring mounting direction

A: Timing roller
B: Timing cam
C: Collar
D: Load spring
E: Bearing bush

5 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT-POSITIONING UNIT

5. Removing the Print-Positioning Unit


(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the controller.
(3) Remove the Timing gear spring [A].
(4) Unplug the connectors on the Vertical centering sensor [B] and Print-positioning pulse motor [C].
(5) Remove the E-ring on the Cam follower arm [D], and remove the Cam follower arm [D] and Washers
[F] (one each on the front and rear of the Cam follower arm [D]) from the Timing gear [E].
(6) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 8 pcs) on the Print-positioning unit [G], and then remove the
Print-positioning unit [G].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• When mounting the print-positioning unit [G], the Timing gear [E] should be turned all the way in the
clockwise direction.

[Adjustment after Reassembly]


• Adjust the timing cam mounting position.

D E

G A

C
A: Timing gear spring
B: Vertical centering sensor
C: Print-positioning pulse motor
D: Cam follower arm
E: Timing gear
F: Washer
G: Print-positioning unit

5 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE VERTICAL CENTERING SENSOR

6. Removing the Vertical Centering Sensor


(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screw (3 x 6: 1 pc), and then remove the Vertical
centering sensor [B] together with the Vertical centering sensor bracket [C].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Align the two faces of the Vertical centering sensor bracket [C] as shown in the photograph below.

Align faces.

C
A: Print-positioning base unit
B: Vertical centering sensor
C: Vertical centering sensor bracket

5 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT-POSITIONING PULSE MOTOR

7. Removing the Print-Positioning Pulse Motor


(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the following components.
• Controller
• Timing gear spring
• Print-positioning unit [A]
(3) Remove the E-ring and remove the Print-positioning cam [B].
(4) Remove the E-ring and remove the Print-positioning intermediate gear [C].
(5) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 6: 2 pcs) on the Print-positioning pulse motor [D], and then
remove the Print-positioning pulse motor [D].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Insert the Print-positioning plate shaft [F] into the spiral groove [G] on the Print-positioning cam [B].

E
D

D B

A: Print-positioning unit
B: Print-positioning cam G
C: Print-positioning intermediate gear
D: Print-positioning pulse motor
E: Print-positioning plate ass’y
F: Print-positioning plate ass’y pin
G: Spiral groove on the Print-positioning cam

5 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
REMOVING THE TIMING GEAR

8. Removing the Timing Gear


(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the following components.
• Controller
• Guide roller spring
• Timing cam [A]
• Timing gear spring [B]
• Print-positioning unit [C]
(3) Remove the E-ring from the Timing gear shaft [E] and remove the Timing gear [D].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Adjust the mounting position of the timing cam.

A
D

B
C

A: Timing cam
B: Timing gear spring
C: Print-positioning unit
D: Timing gear
E: Timing gear shaft

5 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION
TIMING CAM MOUNTING POSITION

Adjustment
1. Timing Cam Mounting Position
Procedure
(1) Move the print drum to position A, centralize the printing position, switch off the power, and then
remove the rear cover.
(2) With the positioning marks aligned on the Main cam and print-positioning unit, check that the
positioning marks [C] are aligned on the Timing gear [B] and Timing cam [A]. (See photograph 1.)
* The alignment may be offset in the direction shown in photograph 2, but not in the direction
shown in photograph 3.
(3) If not aligned, remove the E-ring from the timing roller shaft and remove the timing cam [A].
(4) Mount the Timing cam [A] and Timing gear [B] with the positioning marks [C] aligned.

Symptoms
• If the timing cam is incorrectly positioned, the timing of the guide roller’s vertical movement will be
off, and paper jamming, print registration problems, or ghosting may occur.

A B

Photograph 1 A: Timing cam


C B: Timing gear
C: Positioning marks

YES NO

Photograph 2 Photograph 3

5 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6: PRESS SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 6-2


1. Press Mechanism .................................................................................................... 6-2
2. Pressure Control Mechanism .................................................................................. 6-4
Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................ 6-5
1. Removing the Pressure Roller ................................................................................. 6-5
2. Removing the Pressure Solenoid ............................................................................ 6-6
3. Removing the Pressure Lever Ass’y ........................................................................ 6-7
4. Removing the Pressure Control Motor and Print Pressure Control Sensor ........... 6-8
Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 6-10
1. Mounting Position of the Pressure Lever Ass’y .................................................... 6-10

6–1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION
PRESS MECHANISM

Mechanism
1. Press Mechanism
The main motor activates when printing begins, and the Pressure solenoid [F] activates once the print
drum rotates through 40°.
As the clamp plate base on the print drum approaches the pressure roller, the protrusion on the Pressure
cam [A] pushes against Pressure lever A [B] to rotate it clockwise. This rotary motion causes Pressure
lever A [B] to push against Pressure lever B [C], and the Solenoid lever [G] separates from Pressure lever
B [C] and descends.
Once the protrusion on the Pressure cam [A] has passed, pressure lever A [B] rotates counter-clockwise.
Likewise, Pressure lever B [C] is pulled by the tension of the Pressure spring [D] and Second pressure
spring [E], and rotates in unison with Pressure lever A [B]. The Pressure shaft [H] fixed to Pressure lever
B [C] therefore also rotates counter-clockwise. The pressure roller therefore rises and is pressed against
the print drum.
During printing, the Pressure cam [A] pushes against Pressure lever A [B] and lowers the pressure roller
to prevent the pressure roller from touching the print drum clamp plate base. The Pressure solenoid [F]
remains activated.
After printing is complete, the Pressure solenoid [F] is deactivated when the print drum reaches the 135°
position.

E D C

F G H

6–2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION
PRESS MECHANISM

C B A

Pressure roller is raised

C B A

Pressure roller is lowered

A: Pressure cam
B: Pressure lever A
C: Pressure lever B
D: Pressure spring
E: Second pressure spring
F: Pressure solenoid
G: Solenoid lever
H: Pressure shaft

6–3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION
PRESSURE CONTROL MECHANISM

2. Pressure Control Mechanism


Pressing the < > or < > print density keys on the panel activates the Pressure control motor [A] and
moves the Print pressure gear ass’y [D]. The movement of the Print pressure gear ass’y [D] varies the
tension of the second pressure spring [B].
This alters the pressure acting on Pressure lever B [C], and varies the print density by varying the
pressure of the pressure roller against the print drum. The pressure control motor is not actually
activated until the START key is pressed.
The printing pressure will vary depending on the printing speed and print density settings, the ink color,
the length of time the print drum remains standing, and the print drum’s internal temperature.
The Print pressure control sensor [E] checks the standard printing pressure position.

A B C

E D

A: Pressure control motor


B: Second pressure spring
C: Pressure lever B
D: Print pressure gear ass’y
E: Print pressure control sensor

6–4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION
REMOVING THE PRESSURE ROLLER

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Pressure Roller
(1) Pull out the print drum.
(2) Insert a screwdriver through the opening in the front frame of the machine, and remove the retaining
screw [B].
(3) Slide the Pressure roller [A] forward until the bearing [C] disengages from the Pressure roller bracket
[D], and then lift upward to remove it.

C A

B D

A: Pressure roller
B: Retaining screw
C: Bearing
D: Pressure roller bracket

6–5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION
REMOVING THE PRESSURE SOLENOID

2. Removing the Pressure Solenoid


(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4x8: 3 pcs), and pull the Filter PCB unit [A] forward.
(3) Remove the Second pressure spring [B] and Pressure spring [C].
(4) Unplug the connector [D], remove the mounting screws (M4x8: 4 pcs) on the Solenoid base ass’y [E],
and then remove the Solenoid base ass’y [E].
(5) Unplug the Pressure solenoid connector [G], remove the mounting screws (M3x6: 2 pcs), and then
remove the Pressure solenoid [F].

[Work Precautions]
• The Pressure spring and Second pressure spring are extremely powerful. Take care to avoid injury
when removing or refitting.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Align the half-pierce.

A E

F
A: Filter PCB unit
B: Second pressure spring
C: Pressure spring
D: Connector G E
E: Solenoid base ass’y
F: Pressure solenoid
G: Pressure solenoid connector

6–6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION
REMOVING THE PRESSURE LEVER ASS’Y

3. Removing the Pressure Lever Ass’y


(1) Make a confidential master, and then bring the print drum to position A.
(2) Open the scanner table, and remove the rear cover.
(3) Remove the screws and pull forward the filter PCB unit.
(4) Remove both the Second pressure spring and Pressure spring.
(5) Loosen the two set screws [D] on Pressure lever B [A] using an Allen wrench (3 mm), and remove the
Pressure lever ass’y (Pressure lever A [B] + Pressure lever B [A]) from the Pressure shaft [C].

[Work Precautions]
• The Pressure spring and Second pressure spring are extremely powerful. Take care to avoid injury
when removing or refitting.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Adjust the mounting position of the Pressure lever ass’y.

Enlarged view

B
A

Enlarged view

A: Pressure lever B
B: Pressure lever A C
C: Pressure shaft
D: Set screw

6–7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION
REMOVING THE PRESSURE CONTROL MOTOR AND PRINT PRESSURE CONTROL
SENSOR
4. Removing the Pressure Control Motor and Print Pressure Con-
trol Sensor
Removing the Pressure Control Motor
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the E-ring and the Drive transfer gear [C].
(3) Unplug the connector [B] on the Pressure control motor [A], remove the mounting screws (M3x6: 2
pcs), and then remove the Pressure control motor [A].

Removing the Print Pressure Control Sensor


(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the mounting screws on the filter PCB unit, and then pull it forward.
(3) Unplug the connector [E] on the Print pressure control sensor [D], remove the mounting screw
(M3 x 6: 1 pc), and then remove the Print pressure control sensor [D] together with the Print
pressure control sensor bracket [F].

[Precautions on Reassembly] D
• Align the half-pierce.

A: Pressure control motor


B: Pressure control motor connector
C: Drive transfer gear
D: Print pressure control sensor
E: Print pressure control sensor connector
F: Print pressure control sensor bracket E

6–8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

[Memo]

6–9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION
MOUNTING POSITION OF THE PRESSURE LEVER ASS’Y

Adjustment
1. Mounting Position of the Pressure Lever Ass’y
Checking and adjustment procedure
(1) Make a confidential master, and then bring the print drum to position A.
(2) Remove the rear cover.
(3) Remove the screws and pull forward the filter PCB unit.
(4) Remove the Second pressure spring, push up the Pressure lever B [A], and disengage it from the
Solenoid lever [D].
(5) Attach the Second pressure spring and check that the gap between Pressure lever A [B] and
Pressure lever B [A] is between 1.5 mm and 2.0 mm. (See detailed figure 2.)
(6) If the gap in step (5) is outside the specifications, remove the Second pressure spring and
loosen the two set screws on Pressure lever B [A]. Insert a 3 mm Allen wrench [C] between
Pressure lever A [B] and Pressure lever B [A] (see detailed figure 1), rotate the Pressure shaft [E]
fully counter-clockwise, and then tighten the set screws on Pressure lever B [A] with the pressure
roller pressing hard against the print drum. The Pressure lever B [A] should be pushed all the
way back against the machine, when tightening the set screws.
(7) Check as in step (5), and if the gap is still outside the specifications, repeat step (6). If the gap is
within the specifications, push Pressure lever B [A] upwards, lock with the Solenoid lever [D], and
attach the Second pressure spring.

Symptoms
• If the gap is too small, the pressure will be too weak, and the printing density may become too light.
• If the gap is too large, there will not be sufficient space between the Pressure roller and the Clamp
plate base on the print drum, and they may touch, damaging the Clamp plate base.

B C D

6 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION
MOUNTING POSITION OF THE PRESSURE LEVER ASS’Y

Detailed figure 1

A
mm
2.0
1.5–

Detailed figure 2

A: Pressure lever B
B: Pressure lever A
C: Allen wrench (3 mm)
D: Solenoid lever
E: Pressure shaft

6 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

[Memo]

6 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7: PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 7-2


1. Paper Ejection Mechanism ...................................................................................... 7-2
2. Paper Separator Mechanism ................................................................................... 7-3
3. Paper Ejection Wing Mechanism ............................................................................. 7-4
Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................ 7-5
1. Removing the Paper Receiving Tray ........................................................................ 7-5
2. Removing the De-electricity Plate and Suction Unit ................................................. 7-6
3. Removing the Suction Fan ....................................................................................... 7-8
4. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing ......................................................................... 7-9
5. Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Encoder Sensor .................................... 7-11
6. Removing the Transfer Belts ................................................................................. 7-12
7. Removing the Separation Fan Unit ....................................................................... 7-13
8. Removing the Separator Fan and Paper Receiving Sensor ................................ 7-14
9. Removing the Separator ........................................................................................ 7-15
Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 7-16
1. Separator Mounting Position ................................................................................. 7-16

7–1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
PAPER EJECTION MECHANISM

Mechanism
1. Paper Ejection Mechanism
Printed paper is first detached from the print drum by the Separator [B] and two Separation fans [F]. It is
then sent to the paper receiving tray by the Transfer belts [E].
The transfer belts [E] are driven by the Paper ejection motor [C].
Two Suction fans [D] are located below the Transfer belts [E], and these suck the paper onto the transfer
belts [E].
The Paper receiving sensor [A] checks whether the paper is ejected correctly.
The Encoder sensor [G] checks the rotation of the Encoder sensor disc [H] to ensure that the transfer belt
speed is slightly faster than the corresponding print drum rotation speed and ensure smooth paper
ejection from the print drum.

Paper transfer direction


F

E
C

A: Paper receiving sensor D


B: Separator
C: Paper ejection motor
D: Suction fan
E: Transfer belt
F: Separation fans (x2)
G: Encoder sensor
H: Encoder sensor disc
G H C

–7 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
PAPER SEPARATOR MECHANISM

2. Paper Separator Mechanism


The Separator [A] is close to the print drum when the paper is being detached from the print drum. As the
print drum rotates and the clamp plate base approaches the Separator [A], the Separator arm ass’y [G] is
pushed by the Pressure cam [F] on the Print drum pulley. This also pushes the Separator lever [H], and
the Separation shaft [B] rotates, causing the Separator [A] to move away from the print drum.
Likewise, when pulling out the print drum, the Release lever [D] is returned by the Release lever spring
[E]. And when the Release arm [C] is pressed, the Separation shaft [B] rotates, causing the Separator [A]
to move away from the print drum.

A B C

Descends

Pushes
Returns
Front (panel side)

Rear (drive unit side)

A: Separator H
H
B: Separation shaft Separator rises
C: Release arm Separator
descends
D: Release lever
E: Release lever spring
F: Pressure cam
G: Separator arm assembly G G
H: Separator lever

7–3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
PAPER EJECTION WING MECHANISM

3. Paper Ejection Wing Mechanism


The left- and right-hand ejection wings on the Suction unit can be set manually to the raised [B] or lowered
[C] positions to suit the paper ejection requirements. Normally, the ejection wings are raised [B] for
regular paper and lowered [C] for cards.
The ejection wings are raised and lowered by moving the Wing position knob [D] located below the left-
hand Ejection wing [A] up or down.
The Wing position knob [D] has a protruding tab [E] inside, which engages with the catch [F] on the left-
hand Ejection wing [A]. Moving the Wing position knob [D] up and down therefore moves the Ejection
wings up and down.

A B C

E F
D

A: Paper ejection wing (left)


B: Ejection wing position when raised
C: Ejection wing position when lowered
D: Wing position knob
E: Tab or rear of knob
F: Knob catch

7–4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE PAPER RECEIVING TRAY

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Paper Receiving Tray
(1) Fold down the fences of the Paper receiving tray [A], and close the Paper receiving tray [A] to an angle
of about 45°.
(2) Lifting the paper receiving tray [A] vertically upwards at this angle detaches it from the machine.

A: Paper receiving tray

7–5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE DE-ELECTRICITY PLATE AND SUCTION UNIT

2. Removing the De-electricity Plate and Suction Unit


Removing the De-electricity Plate
(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.
• Paper receiving tray
(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 4 pcs) [B] on the De-electricity Plate [A], and then remove
the De-electricity Plate [A].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Align the half-pierce [C] when mounting the De-electricity Plate [A].

A: De-electricity Plate
B: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 4 pcs)
B
C: Half-pierce

Removing the Suction Unit


(3) Unplug the suction unit connector [D].
(4) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) [E] on the Suction unit [F], and then remove the
Suction unit [F] in the same direction that paper is ejected.

D E

D: Suction unit connector [Continued on next page]


E: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2
pcs)
F: Suction unit
7–6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE DE-ELECTRICITY PLATE AND SUCTION UNIT

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Mount the suction unit by hooking the left- and right-hand side front edges [G] onto the brackets [H]
on the machine side frames.

(Enlarged view)

H H

G: Suction unit front edge


H: Brackets

7–7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE SUCTION FAN

3. Removing the Suction Fan


(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.
• Paper receiving tray
• De-electricity Plate
• Suction unit
(2) Turn the Suction unit [A] upside down, and unplug the suction fan connector [B].
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 10: 3 pcs) [C], and remove the Suction fan [D].

B
C

C
D

A: Suction unit
B: Connector
C: Mounting screws (M4 x 10: 3 pcs)
D: Suction fan

7–8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE PAPER EJECTION WING

4. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing


(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.
• Paper receiving tray
• De-electricity Plate
• Suction unit
(2) Lift up the belt driven pulley ass’y [A] with your fingers, unhook from the suction unit, and remove.

A A

A: Belt driven pulley ass’y

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 6 pcs) [C] on the Suction face cover [B].

C
C

B: Suction face cover


C: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 6 pcs) C

(4) Remove the Suction face cover from the Suction unit while threading it beneath the two transfer belts
[D].

D: Transfer belts

[Continued on next page]

7–9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE TIMING ROLLER

(5) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 8: 2 pcs) [F] from both the left- and right-hand Ejection wings [E],
and remove the ejection wings.

E F E F

E: Ejection wings (left, right)


F: Mounting screws (M3 x 8: 2 pcs each)

[Precaution on Reassembly]
• Securely engage the spring [G] beneath the left-hand ejection wing.
• When mounting the ejection wings onto the shaft, mount them on the flat cut surface [H] of the shaft.

G H
G: Spring
H: Flat cut surface

• Locate the Face cover [I] securely onto the half-pierce [J] before screwing on.

I: Face cover
J: Half-pierce J I

7 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE PAPER EJECTION MOTOR AND ENCODER SENSOR

5. Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Encoder Sensor


Removing the Paper Ejection Motor
(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.
• Paper receiving tray
• De-electricity Plate
• Suction unit
• Ejection wings
(2) Unplug the paper ejection motor connector [B].
(3) Remove the Paper ejection motor belt [D], remove the paper ejection motor mounting screws (M3
x 5: 3 pcs) [C], and then remove the Paper ejection motor [A].

A B C D
A: Paper ejection motor
B: Paper ejection motor connector
C: Mounting screws (M3 x 5: 3 pcs)
D: Paper ejection

Removing the Encoder Sensor


(4) Unplug the encoder sensor connector [F], remove the sensor hooks [G] from the mounting
bracket, and then remove the encoder sensor [E].

E: Encoder sensor
F: Connector
G: Sensor hooks

7 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE TRANSFER BELTS

6. Removing the Transfer Belts


(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.
• Paper receiving tray
• De-electricity Plate
• Suction unit
• Ejection wings
(2) Remove the Paper ejection motor belt [A].
(3) Remove the E-rings [B] on the left and right of the Belt pulley shaft [C], and remove the Transfer belts
[D] by sliding them off the Belt pulley shaft [C].

A: Paper ejection motor belt


B: Left and right belt pulley
shaft E-rings
C: Belt pulley shaft
D: Transfer belt B C D B

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Fit the left and right bearings [G] and E-rings [E] on the belt pulley shaft from outside the mounting
brackets.
• Mount the pulley [F] on the left-hand end of the Belt pulley shaft [H] with the flange facing inwards.

E F G H H G E

E: E-ring
F: Pulley
G: Bearing
H: Belt pulley shaft

7 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE SEPARATION FAN UNIT

7. Removing the Separation Fan Unit


(1) Switch off the power and remove the rear cover.
(2) Unplug the separation fan unit connector [A].
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) [B] on the Separation fan unit [C], and remove the
separation fan unit by sliding it in the same direction that paper is ejected.

A B
A: Separation fan unit connector
B: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)
C: Separation fan unit

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Engage the hooks [D] on the Separation fan unit into the slots [E] inside the machine.

D D

E E D

D: Hooks on the Separation fan unit


E: Slots inside the machine

7 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE SEPARATOR FAN AND PAPER RECEIVING SENSOR

8. Removing the Separator Fan and Paper Receiving Sensor


Removing the Separator Fan
(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following component.
• Separation fan unit
(2) Remove the nozzle mounting screw (tapping screw M3 x 10: 3 pcs) [A], and remove the Nozzle [E].
(3) Unplug the two separation fan connectors [D].
(4) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 12: 3 pcs each) [B] from the two Separation fans [C], and
remove both Separation fans [C].

A A E A
B B

C
C

D D

B B B
A: Nozzle mounting screw (tapping screws M3 x 10: 3 pcs)
B: Separation fan mounting screws (M3 x 12: 3 pcs each)
C: Separation fan
D: Separation fan connectors
E: Nozzle

Removing the Paper Receiving Sensor


(5) Disengage the Paper receiving sensor [F] from the hook [G] and remove the Paper receiving
sensor [F].
(6) Unplug the Paper receiving sensor connector [H].

F G H

F: Paper ejection sensor


G: Hook
H: Connector
7 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
REMOVING THE SEPARATOR

9. Removing the Separator


(1) Pull out the print drum, switch off the power, and remove the front cover.
(2) Remove the separator mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc) [A].
(3) Remove the release arm mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc) [B].
(4) Remove the E-ring [C] on the end of the separation shaft, and remove the bearing bush.

A B C

A: Separator mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc)


B: Release arm mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc)
C: Separation shaft end E-ring

(5) Push the Separation shaft [E] back slightly, and remove the rear bearing bush from the machine side
frame. Do not push back the shaft more than necessary. To prevent the components mounted on
the rear from detaching, stop pushing back the shaft once the bush in the rear has been removed.
(6) Slide the Separator [F] and Release arm [G] forward and remove both of these parts off the machine.

D E F G
D: Separation shaft rear bearing bush [Reference]
E: Separation shaft Photograph of separator assembly and rear mount
F: Separator (machine drive side)
G: Release arm

7 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM
SEPARATOR MOUNTING POSITION

Adjustment
1. Separator Mounting Position
(1) Using test chart No.15, create a master and make prints. Check that the paper does not jam on the
drum and that there is no black line through the center of the paper caused by the Separator touching
the print drum. The Separator position is OK if there is no paper jamming on the print drum with 5
mm white margin on the top of the prints.
(2) If the paper sticks to the print drum or black line appears on the printed sheet, stop the print drum at
position-A, switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and then remove the following component.
• Separation fan unit
(3) Insert a screwdriver through the insertion point [B] at the bottom left of Pressure lever A [A], and
loosen the retaining screw [D] on the Separator positioning plate[C].
(4) Insert a penlight inside the machine, on top of the suction unit, and inspect the tip of the Separator [E]
through the square opening in the machine side frame located just above Pressure lever A [A].
(5) Move the Separator positioning plate [C] and tighten the separator positioning plate retaining screw
[D] so that the gap between the Separator [E] tip and the Print drum surface [F] is 1.0 mm to 1.5 mm.

Symptoms
• If the tip of the Separator [E] touches the Print drum surface [F], it will scratch the surface of the
master, causing a black line on the printed sheets.
• Conversely, if the gap is too wide, the paper will not be properly released from the print drum, and
sticks onto the print drum.

A B C D

1.0–1.5 mm
E
A: Pressure lever A
B: Screwdriver insertion point D
C: Separator positioning plate
D: Separator positioning plate retaining screw C
E: Separator
F: Print drum surface
G: Separator positioning plate base G

7 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8: PRINT DRUM SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 8-2


1. Master on Drum (in Printing) Check Mechanism ..................................................... 8-2
2. Print Drum Set Mechanism ...................................................................................... 8-3
3. Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB ................................................................................... 8-4
4. Squeegee Roller Rotation Mechanism .................................................................... 8-5
5. Inking Mechanism .................................................................................................... 8-6
Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................ 8-7
1. Removing the Print Drum Front Cover, Ink Cartridge Guide Ass’y,
Drum Front Upper Cover .......................................................................................... 8-7
2. Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch Cover and Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB .. 8-9
3. Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB Mounting Bracket ........................... 8-10
4. Removing the Swing Base Ass’y ........................................................................... 8-11
5. Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Bottom Ass’y .................................................. 8-12
6. Removing the Ink Pump Unit and Inking Motor ..................................................... 8-13
7. Removing the Print Drum Set Sensor ................................................................... 8-14
8. Removing the Screen ............................................................................................ 8-15
9. Removing the Print Drum Body ............................................................................. 8-16
10. Removing the Ink Sensor PCB .............................................................................. 8-18
11. Removing the Squeegee Roller ............................................................................ 8-19
12. Removing the Print Drum Supports (R) and (F) .................................................... 8-22
Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 8-25
1. Filter Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 8-25
2. Squeegee Gap Adjustment ................................................................................... 8-26
3. Ink Blocking Plate Position Adjustment ................................................................ 8-27
4. Squeegee Pressure Balance Adjustment ............................................................ 8-28

8–1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
MASTER ON DRUM (IN PRINTING) CHECK MECHANISM

Mechanism
1. Master on Drum (in Printing) Check Mechanism
This mechanism checks whether there is a master on the print drum when printing begins.
The print drum begins to rotate when the START key is pressed, and when the print drum reaches the 75°
position, the Master sensor [B] checks whether there is a master [C] on the print drum.
The information checked by the Master sensor [B] is stored until either the print drum is pulled out or the
power is switched off. Subsequent printing therefore starts immediately after the START key is pressed.
If light is not reflected back to the Master sensor [B] (implying that the master is absent) when the print
drum reaches the 75° position at the start of the printing, it is assumed that there is no master on the print
drum.

A
B

Print drum
75°
position C

Print drum
75° position

A: Light absorber strip


B: Master sensor (reflective type)
C: Master

8–2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
PRINT DRUM SET MECHANISM

2. Print Drum Set Mechanism


The Print drum set sensor [A] checks whether the print drum is correctly set in the machine.
A light beam from the Print drum set sensor [A] is transmitted when the levers are gripped, and blocked
when they are released.
The light beam of print drum set sensor [A] is therefore transmitted if the print drum is not correctly set in
the machine.

A A

Print drum set sensor light beam is blocked. Print drum set sensor light beam is transmitted.
Print drum is assumed to be in place. Print drum is assumed not to be in place.

A: Print drum set sensor

8–3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
INK CARTRIDGE SET SWITCH PCB

3. Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB


Different Ink cartridge set switch PCBs are used for the black ink and color ink print drums.
The black ink cartridge set switch PCB [A] has five sensors, while the color ink cartridge set switch PCB
[B] has three sensors.
The sensors on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB determines whether correct ink for the print drum is set
in place.

A: Ink cartridge set switch PCB (for black ink)


B: Ink cartridge set switch PCB (for color ink)
C: Ink cartridge set switch PCB sensors
D: Protrusion on the front end of the ink cartridge presses sensor actuator on the Print drum set switch
PCB.

8–4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
SQUEEGEE ROLLER ROTATION MECHANISM

4. Squeegee Roller Rotation Mechanism


The main motor drives the Joint gear [A] via the Junction gear ass’y [B], and this rotates the Print drum
main gear [C].
The rotation also drives the Squeegee roller gear (R) [D] via the gears to rotate the Squeegee roller [E].
The Squeegee roller [E] drives the Driven shaft [H] via the Squeegee roller gear (F) [F].
The Squeegee roller gear (R) [D] contains a one-way clutch to prevent the Squeegee roller [E] from
rotating when the print drum is manually rotated in the reverse direction.

G H

C
F
A

E D
A: Joint gear
B: Junction gear ass’y
C: Print drum main gear
D: Squeegee roller gear (R)
E: Squeegee roller
F: Squeegee roller gear (F)
G: Doctor roller
H: Driven shaft

8–5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
INKING MECHANISM

5. Inking Mechanism
When the main motor is operating and the print drum is rotating, if the ink bead moves away from the Ink
sensor [D], the inking motor activates to pump in the ink from the ink cartridge.
The ink pumped is fed via the hose onto the squeegee roller [E] from the holes in the Ink distributor [F].
The inking motor is switched off when the ink reaches the Ink sensor [D].
The ink deposited on the squeegee roller [E] is made into ink bead between the Squeegee roller [E] and
Doctor roller [A]. The Driven shaft is rotated to build a smooth ink bead.
The ink is transferred onto the print drum from Squeegee roller [E] via a small gap between the Squeegee
roller [E] and Doctor roller [A].
The Overflow sensor [C] checks to prevent ink from overflowing inside the print drum.

F E
E G

A
A: Doctor roller
B: Driven shaft
C: Overflow sensor
D: Ink sensor
E: Squeegee roller
F: Ink distributor
G: Ink bead

8–6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM FRONT COVER, INK CARTRIDGE GUIDE ASS’Y, DRUM FRONT UPPER COVER

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Print Drum Front Cover, Ink Cartridge Guide
Ass’y, Drum Front Upper Cover

A B C

Removing the Print Drum Front Cover


(1) Remove the left- and right-hand mounting screws (M4 x 6: 1 pc each) [E] on the Print drum front
cover [A], and then remove the cover itself.

A A

E E

Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Ass’y


(2) Pull the Ink cartridge release lever [D] and open the swing base.
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [E] on the Ink cartridge guide ass’y [B], and then
remove it.

[Continued on next page]


B

A: Print drum front cover


B: Ink cartridge guide ass’y
C: Drum front upper cover
D: Ink cartridge release lever
E: Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs

F F: Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs

8–7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM FRONT COVER, INK CARTRIDGE GUIDE ASS’Y, DRUM FRONT UPPER COVER

Removing the Drum Front Upper Cover


(4) Remove the Ink cartridge guide ass’y.
(5) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [E] on the Drum front upper cover [C], and then
remove without damaging the two hooks [F] at the inside bottom of the cover.

E F

C: Drum Front Upper Cover


E: Mounting screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc)
F: Hooks (inside bottom of the cover)

8–8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE INK CARTRIDGE SET SWITCH COVER AND INK CARTRIDGE SET SWITCH PCB

2. Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch Cover and Ink Cartridge
Set Switch PCB
Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch Cover
(1) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [C] on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover [A], and
then remove the cover.

Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB


(2) Remove the four connectors on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB [B].
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) [D] on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB [B], and then
remove the PCB.

A: Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover


B: Ink cartridge set switch PCB
C: Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs
D: Mounting screws M4 x 6: 3 pcs

8–9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE INK CARTRIDGE SET SWITCH PCB MOUNTING BRACKET

3. Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB Mounting Bracket


(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.
• rint drum front cover
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover
• vInk cartridge set switch PCB
(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) [C] on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting
bracket [A], and remove the bracket.

A: Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket


B: Ink cartridge set switch PCB
C: Mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs)

8 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE SWING BASE ASS’Y

4. Removing the Swing Base Ass’y


(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.
• Print drum front cover
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [C] on the Swing base ass’y [B].
(3) Push the Ink cartridge release lever ass’y [A] down, open the Swing base ass’y [B], and remove from
the print drum.

C B

A: Ink cylinder release lever ass’y


B: Swing base ass’y
C: Mounting screw (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)

8 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE INK CARTRIDGE GUIDE BOTTOM ASS’y

5. Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Bottom Ass’y


(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.
• Print drum front cover
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket
• Swing base ass’y
(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [E] on the Ink intake nozzle [A], and detach the Ink intake
nozzle [A] from the Nozzle bracket [B].
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) [F] on the Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y [D], and
remove the ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y [D].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• When mounting the Ink cartridge ass’y [D], engage the horizontal hooks into the Drum front support
ass’y [C].

E A

A: Ink intake nozzle


B: Nozzle mounting plate
C: Drum front support ass’y F
D: Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y
E: Mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)
F: Mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs)

8 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE INK PUMP UNIT AND INKING MOTOR

6. Removing the Ink Pump Unit and Inking Motor


Removing the Ink Pump Unit
(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.
• Print drum front cover
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket
• Swing base ass’y
• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y
(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) on the Grip lever [A], and remove the Grip lever [A].
(3) Remove the mounting screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc) [C] on the Pump cover [B], and remove the Pump cover [B].
(4) Pull out the Ink outlet nozzle [D] from the ink distributor.
(5) Unplug the Inking motor connector [E], remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) on the Ink
pump unit [F], and remove the Ink pump unit [F].

A B
C
D E F

A: Grip lever
B: Pump cover
C: Pump cover mounting screw
D: Ink outlet nozzle
E: Connector
F: Ink pump unit

Removing the Inking Motor


(4) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [F] on the Inking motor bracket [D], and then remove
the Inking motor [E] together with its mounting bracket from the ink pump unit.
(5) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 4: 2 pcs) [G] on the Inking motor [E], and detach the Inking
motor [E] from the Inking motor bracket [D].

D: Inking motor bracket


E: Inking motor
F: Mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)
D F D E G: Mounting screws (M3 x 4: 2 pcs)

8 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SET SENSOR

7. Removing the Print Drum Set Sensor


(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.
• Print drum front cover
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket
• Swing base ass’y
• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y
(2) Remove the mounting screw (M3 x 6: 1 pc) [C] on the Print drum set sensor [B], and remove the
sensor with the connector attached.
(3) Unplug the connector [A] from the Print drum set sensor [B].

A B C

A: Connector
B: Print drum set sensor
C: Mounting screw (M3 x 6: 1 pc)

8 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE SCREEN

8. Removing the Screen


[Suggestion prior to starting work]
• Attaching the Print drum stand [B] (Part No. 015-26836-002) to the rear of the Print drum side frame
ass’y [A] makes the work easier by keeping the print drum level.
(1) Make a confidential master, and pull out the print drum.
(2) Remove the two Screen springs [C].
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), which holds both the Clamp plate base [D] and
the Screen [E], and then pull the Screen [E] from underneath the Clamp plate base [D] to
remove.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Take care not to fold the Screen [E].

D E

B A

C
A: Print drum side frame ass’y
B: Print drum stand (015-26836-002)
C: Screen springs
D: Clamp plate base
E: Screen

8 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM BODY

9. Removing the Print Drum Body


(1) Make a confidential master, pull out the print drum, and remove the following component.
• Screen
(2) Remove the mounting screws (special screws: 2 pcs) [B] and remove the Clamp plate base [A].
(3) Peel off the tape [D] on the print drum body [C] alignment section. (Reuse the tape when
reassembling.)
(4) Remove the remaining 10 mounting screws (M4 x 8: 8 pcs and special screws: 2 pcs) on the Print
drum body [C], and remove the Print drum body [C].
[Continued on next page]

C D

A: Clamp plate base


B: Special screws B
C: Print drum body
D: Tape
E: Print drum support (F)
E
F: Print drum support (R)

8 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM BODY

[Precautions on Reassembly: 1]
• Arrow marks are engraved on both sides of the Print drum body, and “F” is engraved at the front.
Likewise, arrow marks are engraved on both the right and left Print drum supports.
Align the arrow marks on the Drum body with those on the Print drum supports with the engraved
“F” on the Drum body at the front. Then attach the Drum body onto the Print drum supports with
mounting scres (M4 x 8: 2 pcs).
Next attach the Special screws.

• Hook the Screen springs into the holes at the leading edges of the Print drum body, and hook the
loop ends over the Special screws. Then attach the remaining screws while applying tension on
the Drum body with the springs. When nearing the last screws, remove the Screen springs and
attach the remaining screws and Clamp plate base after checking the [Precautions on Reassembly:
2] below.

[Precautions on Reassembly: 2]
• Before attaching the Clamp plate base to the Print drum body, affix the tape [D] to the joint section of
the Print drum body [C]. If the tape originally attached to the print drum cannot be reused, insulation
tape may be used. The tape is used to reduce the noise originating from the joint section of the
Print drum body during the printing.

D: Tape

8 – 17
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE INK SENSOR PCB

10. Removing the Ink Sensor PCB


(1) Pull out the print drum, and remove the following components.
• Screen
• Print drum body
(2) Unplug the connector on the Ink sensor PCB [B].
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 8: 2 pcs) on the Ink sensor cover [A], and remove the Ink sensor
cover [A] with the Ink sensor PCB [B] inside.
(4) Remove the Ink sensor PCB [B] from the Ink sensor cover [A].

[Work Precautions]
• Take care not to fold or bend the Ink sensor or Overflow sensor.
If they are bent, straighten them out by hand.

[Checking after Reassembly]


• Check that the Ink sensor does not touch the Doctor roller or Driven shaft.

A: Ink sensor cover


B: Ink sensor PCB

8 – 18
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE SQUEEGEE ROLLER

11. Removing the Squeegee Roller


(1) Pull out the print drum, and remove the following components.
• Print drum front cover
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket
• Swing base ass’y
• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y
• Ink pump unit
• Screen
• Print drum body
• Ink sensor PCB
(2) Remove the two mounting screws on the Junction gear ass’y [A], and remove the Junction gear ass’y
[A].

A
A: Junction gear ass’y

(3) Remove the mounting screws (3 x 6: 1 pc each) on the two Eccentric boss stopper plates [B], and
remove the Eccentric bosses [C].
(4) With the print drum at position A, remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 1 pc each) on the Ink blocking
plates [D] via the holes in the left and right Print drum supports.

[Continued on next page]

B: Eccentric boss stopper plate


B C: Eccentric bosses
D: Ink blocking plates

8 – 19
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE SQUEEGEE ROLLER

(5) With the print drum at position-A, remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs each) on the Squeegee
frames [L] via the holes in the left and right Print drum supports.

L: Squeegee frames

(6) Remove the mounting screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc), and remove the Print drum lock plate ass’y [E].

E
E: Print drum lock plate ass’y

(7) Remove the Pivot screw [F] on the front of the print drum via the opening in the Print drum support (F)
where the Print drum lock plate ass’y was removed. Likewise, remove the Pivot screw [G] on the
front of the print drum via the opening in the Print drum support (R).
(8) Remove the Squeegee bottom ass’y [H] from the squeegee unit.

H
F: Pivot screw (print drum front)
G: Pivot screw (print drum rear)
H: Squeegee bottom ass’y [Continued on next page]

8 – 20
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE SQUEEGEE ROLLER

(7) Remove the E-rings on both ends of the Squeegee roller [I], remove the gears [J], remove the
bearings [K], and then remove the Squeegee roller [I] from the Squeegee frame [L].
(The Doctor roller [M] and Driven shaft [N] will also come loose when removing the Squeegee roller
[I], and are disassembled as shown below.)

N M L K J

I: Squeegee roller
J: Gear
K: Bearing
L: Squeegee frame
M: Doctor roller
N: Driven shaft J K L I

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Align the positioning hole [P] in the Joint gear [O] over the positioning holes in the Drum rear frame
plate and Print drum main gear.
• Adjust the position of the Junction gear ass’y [Q] to allow a small amount of backlash between the
Junction gear and the Joint gear [O] (and Print drum main gear).

O Q

O: Joint gear P
P: Joint gear positioning holes
Q: Junction gear ass’y

[Adjustment after Reassembly]


• Squeegee gap adjustment
• Ink blocking plate position adjustment
• Squeegee pressure balance adjustment

8 – 21
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SUPPORTS (R) AND (F)

12. Removing the Print Drum Supports (R) and (F)


(1) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.
• Print drum front cover
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket
• Swing base ass’y
• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y
• Screen
• Print drum body
(2) Unplug the connector on the Ink sensor PCB.
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) on the Junction gear ass’y [A], and remove the Junction
gear ass’y [A].

A: Junction gear ass’y


C B: C-ring
C: Joint gear

(4) Remove the C-ring [B] retaining the Joint gear [C] on the ink distributor, and remove the Joint gear [C].
(5) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [E] retaining the Drum rear frame plate [D] to the print
drum side frame ass’y.
D E

F D: Rear frame
E: Mounting screw (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)
F: Mounting screw (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

(6) Remove the screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) [F] that hold the Drum rear frame plate [D] to the Drum shaft
clamper [G], and slide out the Drum rear frame plate [D] from the ink distributor.
(7) Loosen the 3-mm Allen bolts [H] on the Drum shaft clamper [G], and slide out the Drum shaft
clamper [G] from the ink distributor.
(8) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 12: 4 pcs) [J] on the Print drum main gear [I], and slide out the
Print drum main gear [I] from the ink distributor.

[Continued on next page]


K
G
G: Drum shaft clamper
J H: 3-mm Allen bolts
I: Print drum main gear
I J: Mounting screw
(M4 x 12: 4 pcs)
K: Print drum support (R)
H
8 – 22
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SUPPORTS (R) AND (F)

(9) Pull the print drum support (R) [K] from the ink distributor.
(10) Pull the Ink outlet nozzle [A] from the ink distributor.
(11) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 3 pcs) [B] on the Drum front support ass’y [C], and remove the
Drum front support ass’y [C] from the drum shaft clamper.

C
A

A: Ink outlet nozzle


B: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 3 pcs)
C: Drum front support ass’y

B
(12) Loosen the 3-mm Allen bolt [E] on the Drum shaft clamper [D], and slide out the Drum shaft clamper
[D] from the ink distributor.
(13) Slide out the Print drum support (F) [G] from the ink distributor, and pull the junction wire harness [F]
out through the Print drum support (F) [G].

[Continued on next page]

D G

E
D: Drum shaft clamper
E: 3-mm Allen bolt
F F: Junction wire harness
G: Print drum support (F)

8 – 23
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SUPPORTS (R) AND (F)

[Precautions on Reassembly: 1]
• Use the tool (Print drum JIG) when tightening the drum shaft clamper mounting screws.

Print drum JIG


015-26128-008

• Move the print drum to position A, insert the tool (Print drum JIG) through the holes in the Drum front
support ass’y [A], Print drum support (F) [B], Print drum support (R) [D], and Drum rear frame plate
[E], and then tighten the Allen bolts on both Drum shaft clampers.

A
B

C
A: Drum front support ass’y
B: Print drum support (F)
C: Tool (Print drum JIG)
D
D: Print drum support (R)
E: Drum rear frame plate

[Precautions on Reassembly: 2]
• Align the positioning hole [G] in the Joint gear [F] over the positioning holes in the Drum rear frame
plate and Print drum main gear.
• Adjust the position of the Junction gear ass’y [H] to allow a small amount of backlash between the
Junction gear and the Joint gear [F] (and Print drum main gear).

F
H

F: Joint gear G
G: Joint gear positioning holes
H: Junction gear ass’y

8 – 24
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
FILTER CLEANING

Adjustment
1. Filter Cleaning
(1) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket
(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs and M3 x 10: 2 pcs) on the Ink intake nozzle [A], and
remove the nozzle.
(3) Remove the Filter [B] and clean it.

[Symptoms]
• If foreign matter is drawn into the filter, ink will no longer be drawn in, resulting in a lack of ink in the
print drum.

Top

Bottom

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Mount the Filter [B] with the rounded top facing upwards.
• Engage the lug on the bottom of the Ink intake nozzle [A] into the slot in the lower base [C].

A: Ink intake nozzle


B: Filter
C: Lug and slot

8 – 25
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
SQUEEGEE GAP ADJUSTMENT

2. Squeegee Gap Adjustment


(1) Pull out the print drum, and remove the following components.
• Screen
• Print drum body
(2) Clean out the ink inside the squeegee unit.
(3) Using a feeler gauge, check that the gap between the Squeegee roller and Doctor roller is in
specified setting (0.08 mm ±0.02 mm at front and rear).
(4) If the gap is outside the specifications, loosen the retaining screw on the Doctor roller adjust plate [A]
with 3mm Allen wrench.
(5) Insert the Allen wrench [C] into the hole in the Doctor roller adjust plate [A], and make the adjustment
by moving the adjustment plate.
(6) Tighten the retaining screw.

[Symptoms]
• If the gap is too large, more ink than is necessary will be transferred onto the inside surface of the
print drum, causing ink to leak.
• Conversely, if the gap is too small, insufficient ink will be transferred onto the inside surface of the
print drum, possibly resulting in uneven printing density due to lack of ink.

B
Front

Reduce

Increase

Reduce

Increase
C
Rear

A: Doctor roller adjust plate


B: Allen bolt for 3 mm Allen wrench
C: 2.5 mm Allen wrench

8 – 26
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
INK BLOCKING PLATE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

3. Ink Blocking Plate Position Adjustment


Front
(1) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.
• Print drum front cover
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket
• Swing base ass’y
• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y
• Ink pump unit
(2) Loosen the mounting screw on the Ink blocking plate (F) [A] via the opening in the Print drum
support (F).
(3) Insert a slot-head screwdriver into the slot in the Ink blocking plate (F) [A] and move the plate until
it is flush with the inside surface of the print drum. Tighten the mounting screw.

Rear
(1) Pull out the print drum, and loosen the mounting screw on the Ink blocking plate (R) [B] via the
opening in the Print drum support (R).
(2) Insert a slot-head screwdriver into the slot in the Ink blocking plate (R) [B] and move the plate until
it is flush with the inside surface of the print drum. Tighten the mounting screw.

[Symptoms]
• If the ink blocking plates are not flush with the inside surface of the print drum, they will not be able
to block the ink exuded to the ends of the Squeegee roller. Ink will accumulate inside the print drum,
and in the worst cases, ink may leak out from the print drum body.

A: Ink blocking plate (F) B A


B: Ink blocking plate (R)

8 – 27
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
SQUEEGEE PRESSURE BALANCE ADJUSTMENT

4. Squeegee Pressure Balance Adjustment


(1) Create a master with test chart No. 15 and print to check the left and right print density balance.
(2) If the left and right print density is not balanced, adjust as shown below.

Front
(3) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.
• Print drum front cover
• Ink cartridge guide ass’y
• Drum front upper cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover
• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket
• Swing base ass’y
• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y
• Ink pump unit
(4) Loosen the two retaining screws on the squeegee frame via the opening in the Print drum support (F).
(5) Insert a slot-head screwdriver via the opening in the Print drum support (F), turn the Eccentric
boss [A], and adjust so that the gap between the squeegee roller and the print drum body is
approx. 0.3 mm.
(6) Tighten the two retaining screws [B] on the squeegee frame.

Rear
(3) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following component.
• Junction gear ass’y
(4) Loosen the two retaining screws on the squeegee frame via the opening in the Print drum support
(R).
(5) Insert a slot-head screwdriver via the opening in the Print drum support (R), turn the Eccentric boss
[A], and adjust so that the gap between the squeegee roller and the print drum body is approx. 0.3
mm.
(6) Tighten the two retaining screws [B] on the squeegee frame.

Rear

Front

A: Eccentric boss
B: Retaining
screws
8 – 28
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION
SQUEEGEE PRESSURE BALANCE ADJUSTMENT

[Continued on next page]


• Using your finger, press the print drum from underneath, and adjust the gap to approx. 0.3 mm.

[Checking after Adjustment]


• Run an actual print after the adjustment to check the left and right print density balance.
If the left and right print density balance is incorrect, the squeegee pressure must be readjusted.

[Symptoms]
• Incorrect left and right squeegee pressure causes unbalanced print density.
• If the squeegee pressure is too high (gap too small), more ink than is needed will be transferred
onto the print drum and may cause ink leakage.
• If the squeegee pressure is too low (gap too large), the print density will be reduced, and excess
load will be applied on the print drum and may shorten the life of the drum body.

8 – 29
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

[Memo]

8 – 30
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 9: MASTER CLAMP SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 9-2


1. Clamp Unit Home Positioning Mechanism ............................................................. 9-2
2. Clamp Plate Master Release Mechanism ............................................................... 9-3
3. Clamp Plate Master Clamp Mechanism .................................................................. 9-4
Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................ 9-5
1. Removing the Clamp Unit ........................................................................................ 9-5
2. Removing the Clamp Motor, Clamp Sensor A, Clamp Sensor B ............................ 9-6

9–1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION
CLAMP UNIT HOME POSITIONING MECHANISM

Mechanism
1. Clamp Unit Home Positioning Mechanism
When the START key is pressed to create confidential or normal masters, the Clamp open arm [A] and
Master release arm [B] are checked to ensure that they have returned to the home position (with the light
paths to both Clamp sensors A [F] and B [G] open). If they are not at the home position, the Clamp motor
[C] is activated to move the Clamp cam assembly [D] and return the Clamp open arm [A] and Master
release arm [B] to the home position until the light paths to both Clamp sensors A [F] and B [G] are open.

C B
D E

G
View in the direction
of the arrow

A: Clamp open arm


B: Master release arm
C: Clamp motor
D: Clamp cam assembly
E: Clamp encoder sensor
F: Clamp sensor A
G: Clamp sensor B

9–2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION
CLAMP PLATE MASTER RELEASE MECHANISM

2. Clamp Plate Master Release Mechanism


When the START key is pressed to create confidential or normal masters, the print drum makes one turn
and checks for the presence of master on the print drum. Once the presence of a master on the drum
has been checked, the drum returns to position-A, and the clamp plate master release operation starts.
The clamp motor activates and rotates the Clamp cam assembly [A]. This pushes down the Clamp open
arm [B] and opens the Clamp plate [C]. The Master release arm [D] is then pushed down, and the Master
release bar [E] is raised, releasing the master from the Clamp plate [C].
The clamp motor continues to run, and raises the Clamp open arm [B] and Master release arm [D]. The
motor is switched off once the light path to Clamp sensor B [G] is opened.

(1) The Clamp open arm is pushed A


down, opening the Clamp plate.

(2) The Master release arm is pushed


down, raising the Master release
bar and releasing the master. D

(3) The Clamp open arm and Master


release arm are raised, and the
motor switches off once the light
path to Clamp sensor B is opened.

F
A: Clamp cam assembly
B: Clamp open arm
C: Clamp plate G
D: Master release arm
E: Master release bar
F: Clamp sensor A
G: Clamp sensor B

9–3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION
CLAMP PLATE MASTER CLAMP MECHANISM

3. Clamp Plate Master Clamp Mechanism


As the used master is removed from the print drum, the print drum makes one revolution and returns to
position-A, and the clamp plate master clamp operation starts.
The clamp motor activates and rotates the Clamp cam assembly [A]. This pushes down the Clamp open
arm [E] and opens the Clamp plate [B].
The clamp motor is switched off once the light path to Clamp sensor A [D] is opened. (It stops with
Clamp plate [B] still open.)
The load pulse motor feeds a set amount of the master [G] onto the print drum, and the clamp motor
activates to rotate the Clamp cam [A] and raise the Clamp open arm [E].
The clamp motor is switched off once the light path to Clamp sensor B [F] is opened. (The clamp unit is
returned to the home position.)
(1) The Clamp open arm [E] is pushed down, opening the Clamp plate [B]. The clamp motor is switched
off once the light path to Clamp sensor A [D] is opened (with Clamp plate [B] still open).

C
A

B
D

(2) The master [G] is fed onto the print drum, and the clamp motor is switched on, raising the Clamp
open arm [E]. The clamp motor is switched off once the light path to Clamp sensor B [F] is opened.
(Returns to home position.)

E A: Clamp cam assembly


B: Clamp plate
C: Clamp encoder
F
D: Clamp sensor A
E: Clamp open arm
G F: Clamp sensor B
G: Master

9–4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION
REMOVING THE CLAMP UNIT

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Clamp Unit
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the Main PCB.
(3) Unplug the clamp motor connector [A] and sensor connector [B].
(4) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 3 pcs) [C] on the clamp unit, and remove the clamp unit.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Align the half-pierced sections.

B C C

A: Clamp motor connector


B: Clamp sensor connector
C: Clamp unit mounting screw

9–5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION
REMOVING THE CLAMP MOTOR, CLAMP SENSOR A, CLAMP SENSOR B

2. Removing the Clamp Motor, Clamp Sensor A, Clamp Sensor B


Removing the Clamp Motor
(1) Remove the following components.
• Rear cover
• Main PCB
• Clamp unit
(2) Remove the E-ring and remove the Worm gear [A].
(3) Unplug the connector [C], remove the mounting screws, and remove the Clamp motor [B].

Removal of Clamp Sensor A


(1) Remove the following components.
• Rear cover
• Main PCB
• Clamp unit
(2) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 6: 2 pcs) and remove the Shaft support bracket [D].
(3) Unplug the connector and remove Clamp sensor A [E].

Removal of Clamp Sensor B


(1) Remove the following components.
• Rear cover
• Main PCB
• Clamp unit
(2) Remove the mounting screw (M3 x 6: 1 pc) and remove the sensor bracket [F].
(3) Unplug the connector and remove Clamp sensor B [G] from the sensor bracket [F].

A
D C

F G
A: Worm gear
B: Clamp motor
C: Connector
D: Shaft support bracket
E: Clamp sensor A
F: Sensor bracket
G: Clamp sensor B

9–6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10: MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 10-2


1. Master Removal Mechanism ................................................................................. 10-2
2. Master on the Drum (before Master Removal) Check Mechanism ...................... 10-3
3. Removed Master Vertical Transport Mechanism .................................................. 10-4
4. Disposed Master Compression Mechanism ....................................................... 10-5
5. Disposal Box Safety Switch ................................................................................... 10-8
Removal and Assembly ..................................................................................................... 10-9
1. Removing the Master Removal Hook ................................................................... 10-9
2. Removing the Master Removal Unit .................................................................... 10-10
3. Removing the Master Disposal Gate Housing ................................................... 10-12
4. Removing the Master Removal Roller (Bottom) ................................................. 10-13
5. Removing the Master Compression Plate .......................................................... 10-14
6. Removing the Motors ........................................................................................... 10-16

10 – 1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
MASTER REMOVAL MECHANISM

Mechanism
1. Master Removal Mechanism
Masters on the print drum are removed as follows.
(1) At the start of master removal, the Master sensor [A] checks whether the master to be removed on the
print drum actually exists.
(2) The clamp plate master removal operation is performed with the print drum at position A to release
the leading edge of the master from the clamp plate.
(3) The Master removal hook [B] then detaches the master from the print drum as the drum is rotated.
(4) The removed master is fed into the Master compression plate [C].
(5) The removed master is then compressed, and disposed of in the Master disposal box [D].

A
C

A: Master sensor
B: Master removal hook
C: Master compression plate
D: Master disposal box

–10 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
MASTER ON THE DRUM (BEFORE MASTER REMOVAL) CHECK MECHANISM

2. Master on the Drum (before Master Removal) Check Mecha-


nism
When creating confidential or normal masters, the print drum moves to position A, and with the print drum
at the 75° position, the Master sensor [A] checks whether or not there is a master [B] on the drum. (The
check operation is not performed if information that a master is present has already been stored in the
machine’s memory.) The drum rotation angle for the check can be adjusted using test mode No. 580.
If the light from the Master sensor [B] is reflected back, (master present), the master removal sensor
checks whether the master is sent to the master disposal box or not during the master removal.

A
B
Print drum
75° position
C

A: Master sensor
B: Master
C: Light absorber strip

10 – 3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
REMOVED MASTER VERTICAL TRANSPORT MECHANISM

3. Removed Master Vertical Transport Mechanism


When the clamp unit is operated to release the leading edge of the master from the clamp plate, the
Master removal motor [A] activates, rotating the Vertical transport rollers [B, C, D, E, F]. The main motor
also rotates the print drum at the same time.
The master is fed between the rollers and pushed into the Master compression plate [H].
The master is guided here by the Master removal hook [G] and G belt [J].
The main motor and Master removal motor [A] stop once the print drum has rotated to position-A. (The
time at which the master removal motor stops can be adjusted using test mode No. 382.)
When the print drum reaches the 70° and 90° positions, the Master removal sensor [I] checks whether the
master is being fed correctly to the master disposal box. (These drum angles can be adjusted using test
modes No. 380 and 381.)
The master removal hook is normally located at a fixed position close to the print drum, but shifts away
from the drum when the drum is pulled out.
The print drum rotation speed during master removal can be adjusted using test mode No. 387.

D I C J B

F G
E

A: Master removal motor


B: Pulley shaft
C: Master removal roller (top)
D: Master removal pulley (top) A
E: Master removal pulley (bottom)
F: Master removal roller (bottom)
G: Master removal hook
H: Master compression plate
I: Master removal sensor
J: G belt

10 – 4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
DISPOSED MASTER COMPRESSION MECHANISM

4. Disposed Master Compression Mechanism


1) Initializing
• If the light path on the Master compression sensor [B] is open when the power is switched ON or
when everything is reset, the master compression motor operates in the compression direction,
and when the light path to the master compression sensor is blocked, it operates in reverse until
the light path is open again.
• If the light path to the Master compression sensor [B] is blocked when the power is switched ON or
when everything is reset, the master compression motor operates in the return direction until the
light path is open again.
• If the light path to the Master compression sensor [B] is blocked when starting master removal, the
master compression motor operates in the return direction until the light path is open. (The initializ-
ing operation is not performed if the light path to the master compression sensor is open when
starting master removal.)
2) Master compression
Once the removed master vertical transport operation is complete, the master compression motor
operates in the compression direction to lower the Master compression plate [A]. The light path to
the master compression sensor is briefly blocked by the Master compression sensor plate [C].
When the light path to the master compression sensor is subsequently opened again, the master
compression motor stops (the stop time can be adjusted using test mode No. 384), and then
operates in the return direction to return the master compression plate to its home position.
3) Ejection of removed master
The master removed by the vertical transport operation is pushed inside the Master compression
plate [A]. Compression is performed by the master removal motor rotating the Master compression
plate [A] on the Pivot shaft [D]. The Piston shaft link [E] also rotates, but it rotates on the Piston shaft
[F] rather than on the Pivot shaft [D]. This causes the Piston block [G] to move in the direction in
which the master ejects out.

C B A

A: Master compression plate


B: Master compression sensor
F
C: Master compression sensor plate
D: Pivot shaft
E: Piston shaft link E
F: Piston shaft
G: Piston block
G

10 – 5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
DISPOSED MASTER COMPRESSION MECHANISM

4) Disposed-master-full detection
The removed-master-full detection is performed using the following two mechanisms, and a master-
full indication is displayed by either.
(1) The number of masters removed after resetting following the previous master-full indication is
counted, and the master disposal box is determined as full when the count reaches the preset
value.
* The preset master-full count can be set using test mode No. 386.
The master count is not incremented if a master removal error occurs or if the master to be
removed is not detected on the print drum.
(2) Mechanism for mechanically determining that the master disposal box is full (see below.)

Master compression sensor

Disposal box full Master compression sensor plate


sensor
At the start of compression, the light paths to the
master compression sensor and disposal box full
sensors are open.

Master compression plate

Pivot shaft

When the master compression motor operates to start


master compression, the master compression
sensor is immediately blocked by the master
compression sensor plate. As the operation
continues, the disposal box full sensor is briefly
blocked by the master compression plate, but is then
opened.

Once the master inside the master disposal box has


been sufficiently compressed, the master
compression plate stops rotating, but the master
compression sensor plate continues to rotate.
(The master compression plate is mounted to the
pivot shaft via a spring, whereas the master
compression sensor plate is mounted directly to the
pivot shaft.)

Once the light beam of the master compression


sensor is blocked by the master compression sensor
plate, the compression operation stops, and the
master compression plate returns to the home
position.

10 – 6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
DISPOSED MASTER COMPRESSION MECHANISM

When the master disposal box becomes full, the


master compression plate stops rotating before the
removed-master-full sensor is blocked.

When the light path to the master compression


sensor is open and the removed-master-full sensor is
not blocked, the master-disposal-box-full indication is
displayed.

10 – 7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
DISPOSAL BOX SAFETY SWITCH

5. Disposal Box Safety Switch


The master disposal box safety switch checks whether the master disposal box and master disposal
gate housing are properly positioned.
If the master disposal gate housing is locked and correctly set, the bracket on the master disposal gate
housing is positioned close to the safety switch.
When the master disposal box is mounted, the safety switch unit moves back, and the safety switch is
pushed against the master disposal gate housing.
The master disposal box full indication is reset if the master disposal box safety switch is released (the
master disposal box removed) for more than 5 seconds. The master disposal box count memory is also
reset to zero.

Master disposal gate housing

Safety switch

Master disposal box

10 – 8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
REMOVING THE MASTER REMOVAL HOOK

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Master Removal Hook
(1) Pull out the print drum, switch off the power, and remove the front cover.
(2) Remove the spring [A] from the master removal hook bracket.
(3) Remove the bearing fixing plate [B]. (M4 x 8: 1 pc)
(4) Remove the Master removal hook [C] together with the master removal hook bracket. (If it cannot be
removed, it is caught on the front screw of the master removal unit mounting screws. Remove this
screw.)

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Do not drop the inside bearing when mounting the master removal hook bracket.

A: Spring of the master removal hook bracket


B: Bearing fixing plate
C: Master removal hook bracket and master removal hook

10 – 9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
REMOVING THE MASTER REMOVAL UNIT

2. Removing the Master Removal Unit


(1) Move the scanner table to the servicing position [A].
(2) Remove the front and rear covers.
(3) Remove the upper housing cover (master removal unit cover). (M3 x 6: 2 pcs)
(4) Unlock the Release lever [B], fully open the Master disposal gate housing [C], and pull out the master
disposal gate housing horizontally in the direction of paper ejection. The master disposal gate
housing is slotted into the Pivot shafts [D] on both sides. The shafts are cut as shown in the diagram
below, and so the master disposal gate housing can be pulled out provided it is opened sufficiently.

A: Servicing position
B: Release lever
C: Master disposal gate housing
D: Pivot shaft

10 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
REMOVING THE MASTER REMOVAL UNIT

(5) Remove the master removal unit mounting screws (M4 x 8: 4 pcs).

(6) Detach the connectors on both sides, and remove the master removal unit.

10 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
REMOVING THE MASTER DISPOSAL GATE HOUSING

3. Removing the Master Disposal Gate Housing


(1) Remove the E-rings and bearings on both sides of the Pulley shaft [B], and remove the Pulley shaft.
(2) Remove the E-rings, bearings, and gears on both sides of the Master removal roller (top) [A], and
remove the roller.
(3) Remove the G belts [D] from the Master removal pulleys (top) [C].

A D B E

A: Master removal roller (top)


B: Pulley shaft
C: Master removal pulleys (top)
D: G belts
E: Master disposal gate housing

10 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
REMOVING THE MASTER REMOVAL ROLLER (BOTTOM)

4. Removing the Master Removal Roller (Bottom)


(1) Loosen the screws on the Tension roller [A], and remove the belt [B]. (M3 x 6: 2 pcs)
(2) Remove the E-rings, bearings, gears, and pulleys on both sides of the Master removal roller (bottom)
[C], and remove the roller.
(3) Remove the G belts [D].

D
C

A: Tension roller
B: Belt
C: Master removal roller (bottom)
D: G belt

10 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
REMOVING THE MASTER COMPRESSION PLATE

5. Removing the Master Compression Plate


(1) Remove the E-rings and bearings from both sides of the compression shaft [A].
(2) Rotate the compression shaft to move the master Compression plate [C] to the master compressing
position.
Lifting up the compression gear [B] together with the shaft, to disengage the gear, allowing the shaft
to be rotated.
(3) Remove the E-rings on both sides of the Piston shaft [D], and remove the shaft.
(4) Remove the Piston shaft links [E] on both sides.

J A

10 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
REMOVING THE MASTER COMPRESSION PLATE

(5) Remove the shaft from the unit, with the master compression plate attached.

(6) Remove the Piston blocks [F].


(7) Unhook the Compression spring [H] from the Compression plate holder [G], and then remove the
compression plate holder from the Compression shaft [A].
(8) Remove the Master compression sensor plate [I] and then separate the Master compression plate
from the compression shaft.

G H
A: Compression shaft
B: Compression gear
C: Master compression plate
D: Piston shaft
E: Piston shaft link
F: Piston block
G: Compression plate holder
H: Compression spring
I: Master compression sensor plate
J: Compression plate guard cover (* master anti-clamping component)

10 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION
REMOVING THE MOTORS

6. Removing the Motors


(1) Remove the Master removal motor [A]. (Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs)
(2) Remove the Compression motor [B]. (Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs)
(3) Remove the E-rings, and then remove the Safety switch unit [C].

C B
A

A: Master removal motor


B: Compression motor
C: Safety switch unit

10 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11: FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

Contents

Mechanism .......................................................................................................................... 11-2


1. Scanner Table Setting System ............................................................................... 11-2
2. Original Scanning Mechanism ............................................................................... 11-4
3. Flat Bed Initialization Movement ............................................................................. 11-6
4. Stage Glass Original Detection System ................................................................. 11-8
5. Flat Bed Automatic Base Control ......................................................................... 11-10
6. FB Original Scanning Mechanism ........................................................................ 11-12
Removal and Assembly .................................................................................................... 11-14
1. Removing the Scanner Unit ................................................................................. 11-14
2. Removing the Stage Glass .................................................................................. 11-16
3. Removing the Flat Bed Original Detection Sensor .............................................. 11-17
4. Removing the Lamp ............................................................................................. 11-18
5. Removing the Lens Ass’y ..................................................................................... 11-20
Adjustment ......................................................................................................................... 11-22
1. Flat Bed Read Pulse Motor Speed Adjustment ................................................... 11-22
2. FB Scan Start Position Adjustment ...................................................................... 11-23
3. FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment ............................................................. 11-24

11 – 1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
SCANNER TABLE SETTING SYSTEM

Mechanism
1. Scanner Table Setting System
The Flat bed set switch [B] checks whether or not the Scanner table [A] has been set correctly.
This switch also acts as a Safety switch, which cuts the power supply to the main motor and clamp motor,
and thermal power to the TPH if the scanner table is open.

C
B

A: Scanner table
B: Flat bed set switch
C: Damper spring
D: Scanner unit support shaft
E: Scanner table open lever

11 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
SCANNER TABLE SETTING SYSTEM

[Memo]

11 – 3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

2. Original Scanning Mechanism


The FB read pulse motor [J] drives the front and rear Wire spool pulleys [G] via the 2-stage reduction
pulleys linked by the Timing belts [H], [I]. The front and rear wire spool pulleys are configured
symmetrically.
The wire [S] has one end secured to the frame via Coil spring [A], and is wound onto Sliding pulley No. 2
[E] mounted on the Mirror carriage [B]. It is wound approximately 6.5 times around the rear wire spool
pulley [G] via the Fixed pulley [F] secured to the frame. It is then attached to the Lamp carriage [C] and
then secured to the frame via Sliding pulley No. 1 [D] mounted on the Mirror carriage [B]. The Lamp
carriage [C] carries two original illumination Lamps [K] (and lamp inverters) and Mirror No. 1 [M], and the
mirror carriage carries the two mirrors [N], [O].
The mechanism uses a “full/half-rate mirror scanning” system, in which the mirror carriage moves 1/2 L
mm as the lamp carriage moves L mm in the same direction. This means that when the FB read pulse
motor [J] is activated, the original surface can be scanned while maintaining a constant distance between
the original and the center of the lens mounted on the frame. The original on the scanner table
illuminated by the lamp is reflected via mirrors No. 1, 2, and 3, and is then focused onto the CCD [R] by
the lens [Q] in the lens ass’y [P].

F B C
K

11 – 4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

Drive system diagram

C
A D
G

F E B S

I H
J

Optical system diagram

L K

N
C

B
M P

A: Spring K: Lamp
B: Mirror carriage Q R
L: Stage glass
C: Lamp carriage M: Mirror No. 1
D: Sliding pulley No. 1 N: Mirror No. 2
E: Sliding pulley No. 2 O: Mirror No. 3
F: Fixed pulley P: Lens ass’y
G: Wire spool pulley Q: Lens
H: Scanner timing belt 1 R: CCD
I: Scanner timing belt 2 S: Wire
J: Flat bed read pulse motor

11 – 5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
FLAT BED INITIALIZATION MOVEMENT

3. Flat Bed Initialization Movement


Initialization is performed in the following situations to bring the flat bed unit to standby mode.
• When power is switched on
• When everything has been reset

Initialization operation
The Image scanner ADF shading sensor [A] is checked, and if it is OFF (light path open), the Flat-bed
read pulse motor [B] is activated in the return direction until the light path is blocked, and moves the Lamp
carriage [C] towards the left in the photograph. Once the image scanner ADF shading sensor is ON
(blocked), it is moved a further 3 mm before the operation ends. (This position is the “standby position”.)
The actuator plate of the image scanner ADF shading sensor is fixed to the lamp carriage.
No movement is made when the image scanner ADF shading sensor is ON (blocked).

When image scanner ADF shading sensor is OFF

Start Operation ends

on
Image scanner ADF
shading sensor

Flat bed read


Return
pulse motor
(1) 3 mm

(1) If the image scanner ADF shading sensor does not switch to ON when the flat bed read pulse motor
is moved 487 mm in the return direction, the flat bed read pulse motor is assumed to be locked, and
“T14-100” is displayed.

11 – 6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
FLAT BED INITIALIZATION MOVEMENT

C B

A: Image scanner ADF shading sensor


B: Flat bed read pulse motor
C: Lamp carriage

11 – 7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
STAGE GLASS ORIGINAL DETECTION SYSTEM

4. Stage Glass Original Detection System


The Flat bed original detection sensor [B] checks whether an original is placed on the Stage glass [A].
The Flat bed original detection sensor [B] performs its check as soon as the Stage cover [C] is closed
halfway, blocking the light path to the Stage cover sensor [D].
If the light path to the Flat bed original detection sensor [B] is open (original present), the Master-Making/
Print indication on the panel switches to “Master-Making”, and the thermal pressure motor is activated to
lower the thermal head until the TPH pressure sensor switches ON.
At the same time, the lamp illuminates until the shading compensation is made (automatic base control
operation is also performed if original scanning intensity is set to “Auto”), and the lamp carriage returns to
the scanning start standby position and waits. If START key is not pressed within 60 seconds, the lamp
turns off and the lamp carriage returns to the standby position.

C B D A

A: Stage glass
B: Flat bed original detection sensor
C: Stage cover
D: Stage cover sensor

11 – 8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
STAGE GLASS ORIGINAL DETECTION SYSTEM

To FB scanning To FB scanning
Set original operation 1 operation 1

Stage cover sensor

Flat bed original


detection sensor
OFF
Thermal pressure motor
Press

TPH pressure sensor


ON

Lamp Shading adjustment


Feed Feed
Feed Feed
Flat bed read pulse motor
Return
41 mm 8 mm 15 mm 2.6 mm 2.6 mm 20.2 mm

100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms

Flat bed automatic base control


Image scanner ADF
shading sensor

Standby position Scanning start Scanning start


standby position standby position

11 – 9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
FLAT BED AUTOMATIC BASE CONTROL

5. Flat Bed Automatic Base Control


This operation is performed after the shading compensation for line mode only when the original
scanning density is set to “Auto”. (It is not performed in photo, line/photo, dot, and book modes.)
When the START key is pressed, the lamp illuminates, and the flat bed read pulse motor activates in the
scanning direction. It moves 41 mm after the image scanner ADF shading sensor switches from ON to
OFF, and then pauses for a set period. Shading compensation is then performed while it moves 8 mm,
and it then moves 15 mm (9 mm from the leading edge of the original) before the image sensor scans
the surface density of the original. After this, the lamp carriage moves approximately 2.6 mm twice and
scans the surface density of the original. (Total 3 times)
The flat bed read pulse motor then operates in reverse (in the return direction) to return the lamp carriage
to the scanning start standby position, and proceeds to FB scanning operation 1.

A B C

9 mm 2.6 mm 2.6 mm

18 mm
0.8 mm
55 mm

D
Scanning line (lamp carriage) when image scanner ADF shading
sensor switches from ON to OFF

A: Original stopper
B: Shading plate
C: Original
D: Stage glass

11 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
FLAT BED AUTOMATIC BASE CONTROL

START key ON To FB scanning operation 1

Thermal pressure OFF


motor
TPH pressure sensor ON

Lamp
Shading compensation
Feed Feed
Feed Feed
Flat bed read pulse motor Return

41 mm 8 mm 15 mm 2.6 mm 2.6 mm 20.2 mm

100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms


Image scanner ADF
shading sensor

Standby position Scanning start Scanning start


standby position standby position

11 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
FB ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

6. FB Original Scanning Mechanism


This scanning operation describes the following situations. One is in which the ABC (Auto Base Control)
is not performed. The other is when the START key is pressed within 60 seconds of placing the original
on the stage glass (START from FB original scanning operation 1), and when the START key is pressed
after 60 seconds.
If the START key is pressed after 60 seconds have elapsed, the lamp [B] illuminates, and the Flat bed
read pulse motor [A] activates in the feed direction. The Lamp carriage [C] moves to the shading
compensation position, and shading compensation is performed. (See the previous section for the case
in which line mode is selected with original scanning density set at “Auto”, i.e. with ABC.)
It then moves a preset distance in the scanning direction (to the right) from the scanning start standby
position, and the write pulse motor activates. It then moves a further preset distance, switching ON the
read/write signal and initiating scan of the original. (The master making process starts at the same time.)
Once the master making for the size of the original is made, the read/write signal is switched OFF, and
scanning ends. (The master making process also ends at the same time.) The Flat bed read pulse
motor [A] moves the lamp carriage a further 3 mm in the scanning direction before stopping. The Lamp
[B] turns off, and the scanning operation is complete.
The Lamp carriage [C] then returns to the standby position. (Flat bed initialization operation)

B A

A: Flat bed read pulse motor


B: Lamp
C: Lamp carriage

11 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
FB ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

FB scanning operation 1
START key ON START key ON End

OFF
Thermal pressure motor
TPH pressure sensor
ON

Lamp Shading compensation

Feed Feed
Flat bed read pulse motor (11 + b)
41 mm 8 mm mm (L + d) mm 3 mm

100 ms (6 + b - c) mm
Image scanner ADF shading
sensor

Write pulse motor

Read/write signal

Standby position Scanning start


standby position

* L = paper size set by the Users Mode.


Adjustment value b = Adjusted by test mode No. 181 (Flat bed scanning start position adjustment)
Adjustment value c = Adjusted by test mode No. 281 (Master making start position adjustment)
Adjustment value d = Adjusted by test mode No. 282 (Master making length adjustment)

11 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE SCANNER UNIT

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Scanner Unit
(1) Move the carriage to the locking position using test mode No. 154 (scanner lock action), open the
Scanner table [I], secure the mirror carriage using the Transport lock screw [J], and then close again.
(2) Switch off the power, and remove the rear cover.
(3) Remove the Scanner unit cover (left) [B] by removing the four screws (M4 x 8). (If the ADF unit is fitted,
remove the Original receiving tray bracket [C] with the two (M4 x 10) screws and two (M4 x 8) screws,
and then remove the Scanner unit cover (left) [B] before disconnecting the ADF wire harness
connector and ground lead.)
(4) Remove the Stage cover [A] by removing the two screws (M4 x 8), and detach the ground lead. (If the
ADF unit is fitted, turn the ADF mount plate on the rear of the hinge 180 degrees to lock it (see
photograph below), and then remove the ADF unit with the two screws (M4 x 10).)
(5) Remove the Scanner unit cover (rear) [D] by removing the three screws (M4 x 8).
(6) Remove the Scanner unit cover (front) [K] by removing the two upper screws (M4 x 8), and then open
the Scanner table [I] and removing the side screw (M4 x 6).
(7) Remove the Scanner unit cover (right) [E] by removing the two screws (M4 x 8).
(8) Detach the two connectors from the Scanner unit [H]. (Flat cables on main PCB connectors)
(9) Remove the two screws (M4 x 8) on the two Stage cover brackets [G] that secure the Scanner unit [H].
(10) Remove the Stage cover sensor assembly [F] with the screw (M4 x 8).
(11) Remove the six screws (M4 x 8) on the Scanner unit [H], and remove the unit upwards. (Take care
when handling, as this is a heavy precision unit.)

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• When mounting the scanner, align the half-pierced sections of the two front alignment brackets and
those on the two Stage cover brackets [G].
• After reassembling, open the scanner table and remove the transport lock screw on the mirror
carriage. Clear the error message using test mode No. 155 (Scan release action).

* When ADF is fitted (hinge rear)

Position when
removing the ADF unit

* If the scanner locking mode is not cleared using the test mode after reassembling, error message
“T23-111” will be displayed.

11 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
REMOVING THE SCANNER UNIT

B D
C

When ADF is fitted

I K F
G

A: Stage cover
B: Scanner unit cover (left)
C: Original receiving tray bracket
D: Scanner unit cover (rear)
E: Scanner unit cover (right)
F: Stage cover sensor ass’y
G: Stage cover bracket
H: Scanner unit
I: Scanner table
J: Transport lock screw
K: Scanner unit cover (front)
L: ADF mount plate

11 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE STAGE GLASS

2. Removing the Stage Glass


(1) Switch off the power.
(2) Remove the scanner unit cover (left) [A] by removing four screws (M4 x 8). (If the ADF unit is fitted,
remove the original receiving tray bracket by removing the two (M4 x 10) screws and two (M4 x 8)
screws, and then remove the scanner unit cover (left).)
(3) Remove the Original stopper [B] by removing two Special step screws [D], and slide to the left (paper
feed side) slightly before lifting up and removing.
(4) Lift up the left-hand side (paper feed side) of the Stage glass [C] slightly, and slide it out towards the
paper feed side.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Push the stage glass firmly against the right-hand side (ejection side) after placing it on the scanner
unit frame.

C D

A: Scanner unit cover (left)


B: Original stopper
C: Stage glass
D: Special step screw

11 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
REMOVING THE FLAT BED ORIGINAL DETECTION SENSOR

3. Removing the Flat Bed Original Detection Sensor


(1) Switch off the power.
(2) Remove the Stage glass [A]. (Refer to this section for details.)
(3) Unplug the connector, and remove the flat bed original detection sensor [B] by removing one screw
(M3 x 8).

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Engage the hooks on the bottom of the Flat bed original detection sensor into the holes in the
bracket.

A: Stage glass
B: Flat bed original detection sensor

11 – 17
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE LAMP

4. Removing the Lamp


(1) Switch off the power.
(2) Remove the scanner unit cover (left) by removing four screws (M4 x 8). (If the ADF unit is fitted,
remove the original receiving tray bracket by removing two (M4 x 10) screws and two (M4 x 8) screws,
and then remove the scanner unit cover (left).)
(3) Remove the Original stopper by removing the two special step screws, and slide it to the left (paper
feed side) slightly before lifting it up and removing it.
(4) Remove the Stage glass bracket [A] by removing two special screws (M3).
(5) Push the Lamp carriage [B] by hand (taking care not to touch optical components) and move it to the
cutaway [C] in the scanner unit frame. Perform the following procedures on the cutaway section on
the operation panel side of the scanner unit.
(6) Remove the Stopper [D], which holds the lead wire, by removing the screw (M3 x 6).
(7) Remove the wire harness connector [E] of the Lamp.
(8) Remove the Lamps [G].
a) To remove the Lamp on the right-hand side (paper ejection side)of the lamp carriage
Remove the Lamp bracket (with screw hole) [F] by removing screw (M3 x 4), and then remove
the Lamp [G] by pulling it towards the front.
b) To remove the Lamp on the left-hand side (paper feed side) of the lamp carriage
Push the stopper on the Lamp bracket [H] to the right (ejection side) to unlock, and remove it
upwards. Remove the Lamp [G] by pulling it towards the front.

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• The bracket and lamp engage with each other. First engage the lamp on the rear bracket, and then
engage it on the front bracket, which was detached, before finally securing the lamp.
• Mount the Stopper [D] while pressing down the lead wire.
• Secure the Stage glass bracket [A] by engaging it positively with the half-pierced sections on both
sides.

G Engage

11 – 18
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
REMOVING THE LAMP

E D

C
B

F
G

A: Glass stage bracket


B: Lamp carriage
C: Cutaway
D: Stopper
E: Connectors
F: Lamp bracket (with screw hole)
G: Lamps
H: Lamp bracket

11 – 19
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE LENS ASS’Y

5. Removing the Lens Ass’y


(1) Switch off the power.
(2) Remove the stage glass. (Refer to this section for details.)
(3) Remove the Lens cover [A] and the three screws (M3 x 6).
(4) Remove the three washer screws (M3 x 6), detach the ground wire and connector, and then remove
the Lens ass’y [B].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Align the two half-pierced sections [C] on the front of the lens ass’y.
• Do not loosen any screws other than those specified.
• Do not touch the lens or other optical components.

11 – 20
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
REMOVING THE LENS ASS’Y

Loosen these screws.

A: Lens cover
B: Lens ass’y
C: Half-pierce

11 – 21
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
FLAT BED READ PULSE MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment
1. Flat Bed Read Pulse Motor Speed Adjustment
Before making this adjustment, first adjust the image elongation and shrinkage by adjusting the Write
pulse motor speed (see chapter 13).

Checks and procedure


(1) Place B4 size papers on the paper feed tray, place Test chart No. 15 on the stage glass, and
make a master.
(2) Lay the print on top of the test chart original to check that the image elongation and shrinkage of
the print is within ±1.4% at the 310-mm line of the test chart original.
(3) If the elongation or shrinkage is more than the specified range, adjust using test mode No. 182
(flat-bed scanning image elongation and shrinkage adjustment).

11 – 22
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION
FB SCAN START POSITION ADJUSTMENT

2. FB Scan Start Position Adjustment


Checks and procedure
(1) Place a scale face down on the stage glass, pressing the front edge flush against original
stopper, and then close the stage cover.
(2) Select photograph mode, make a master, and then print. Check that the scanning start position
is at 5 mm ± 2 mm on the scale (top 5 mm ± 2 mm is erased).
(3) If the scanning start position is out of the specified range, adjust using test mode No. 181 (flat
bed scanning start position adjustment).

Original stopper
Stage glass

Scale

11 – 23
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION
FB HORIZONTAL SCAN POSITION ADJUSTMENT

3. FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment


Checks and procedure
(1) Place B4 size papers on the paper feed tray, place Test chart No. 15 on the stage glass, and
make a master.
(2) Inspect the master made on the print drum, and check that pattern “e” is not omitted on both the
left and right of the image on the master.
(3) If the pattern is omitted, adjust using test mode No. 180 (Flat bed horizontal scan position
adjustment).

11 – 24
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12: ADF SCANNING SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 12-2


1. ADF Original Set Mechanism ................................................................................ 12-2
2. ADF Original Scanning Mechanism (with Automatic Base Control) ..................... 12-6
3. ADF Original Scanning Mechanism ...................................................................... 12-8
Removal and Assembly .................................................................................................... 12-11
1. Removing the Original Scraper Ass’y .................................................................. 12-11
2. Removing the Pickup Roller ................................................................................ 12-13
3. Removing the Original Stripper Roller ................................................................ 12-14
4. Removing the ADF Original Detection, Original IN, and Original
OUT Sensors ....................................................................................................... 12-15
5. Removing the ADF Original Registration Sensor ............................................... 12-16
6. Removing the ADF Read Pulse Motor ................................................................. 12-17
7. Removing the Registration Roller, Original Read Roller,
and Original Ejection Roller (top) ........................................................................ 12-19
Adjustment ........................................................................................................................ 12-22
1. ADF Scan Start Position Adjustment ................................................................... 12-22
2. ADF Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment .......................................................... 12-23
3. ADF Read Pulse Motor Speed Adjustment
(Image Elongation & Shrinkage Adjustment) ..................................................... 12-24
4. Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ........................................................... 12-25
5. ADF Image Skew Adjustment .............................................................................. 12-26

12 – 1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF ORIGINAL SET MECHANISM

Mechanism
1. ADF Original Set Mechanism
When the original is set along the original guide fence and pushed up against the Original stopper gate
[C], the ADF original detection sensor [A] is activated (light path open) and the Master/Print indicator on the
panel switches to “Master”. The thermal pressure motor operates to lower the thermal head until the TPH
pressure sensor is activated.
After a preset interval, the ADF read pulse motor [O] reverses to lower the Pickup roller [B] in the direction
shown by the arrows and withdraw the Original stopper gate [C] upwards. (The one-way clutch
incorporated between the Registration roller gear [N] and registration roller shaft prevents the
Registration roller [G] from rotating here.)
Once the Pickup roller [B] descends to push against the original, the Pickup roller [B] and Original stripper
roller [D] rotate in the original transport direction, and a single original is fed forward by the action of the
Original stripper roller [D] and Original stripper pad [E]. This activates the ADF original registration sensor
[F] (light path blocked) and the edge of the original is stopped by the Stationary registration roller [G].
Once a preset interval has elapsed from when the ADF original registration sensor [F] was activated, the
ADF read pulse motor [O] operates in the forward direction. This raises the Pickup roller [B] and at the
same time rotating the Registration roller [G], Original read roller [I], and Original ejection roller (top) [J],
which are all linked by the Timing belt [M], in the feed direction.
The original stops briefly after it has been moved 100 mm from the original set position.

A B
F D C

I Original
J feed

H E K

12 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF ORIGINAL SET MECHANISM

O I N G A C L B

M F
J

A: ADF original detection sensor I: Original read roller


B: Pickup roller J: Original ejection Roller (top)
C: Original stopper gate K: Original pickup pad
D: Original stripper roller L: Original guide fence
E: Original stripper pad M: Timing belt
F: ADF registration sensor N: Registration roller gear
G: Registration roller O: ADF read pulse motor
H: Registration driven roller

12 – 3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF ORIGINAL SET MECHANISM

Set original To scanning


operation

Light path open


ADF original detection sensor

OFF
Thermal pressure motor Press

TPH pressure sensor


ON

ADF read pulse motor


Forward
Reverse
ADF original registration sensor

1.5 S (1) 815 ms 50 ms

(1) “A10-107” is displayed if the ADF original registration sensor is not activated (light path blocked) even
when the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 182 mm after the feeding in process begins.

12 – 4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF ORIGINAL SET MECHANISM

[Memo]

12 – 5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM (WITH AUTOMATIC BASE CONTROL)

2. ADF Original Scanning Mechanism (with Automatic Base Con-


trol)
(This operation only occurs when the original scanning density is set to “Auto”.)
Once the ADF original setting operation is complete, pressing the START key illuminates the lamp.
The Flat bed read pulse motor is activated immediately, moving the Lamp carriage in the feed direction to
the shading position. Shading adjustment is performed before moving back in the return direction and
stopping at the ABC scanning position (3 + b) mm in front of the normal ADF scanning position.
The ADF read pulse motor meanwhile operates in the forward direction, rotating the Registration roller,
Master lead roller, and Original ejection roller (top) in the feed direction. The original is fed forward 26.9
mm and stops after the Original IN sensor activates (light path blocked), and the intensity of the original
background color is scanned by the image sensor in this position. The FB read pulse motor then moves
the Lamp carriage back (3 + b) mm in the return direction. (Normal ADF original scanning position)
The ADF read pulse motor immediately operates in the forward direction, and at the same time, the read/
write signal activates, causing scanning of the original to start.
The read/write signal is deactivated a preset interval after the Original IN sensor is deactivated (light path
open) when the original is moved away (or immediately if the Write pulse motor has rotated the equivalent
of the paper size as previously specified by the user settings). The ADF read pulse motor then operates
at high speed as soon as scanning is complete.
Once the original is transported a preset distance after the Original OUT sensor deactivates, the ADF read
pulse motor stops and the ADF original scanning operation is complete.

The Automatic Base Control function does not operate in Photo, Line/Photo, or Dot modes.

12 – 6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM (WITH AUTOMATIC BASE CONTROL)

START key ON End

Lamp

ADF read pulse motor Forward Forward High


speed
ADF original registration
sensor
(1) (3)
Original IN sensor
26.9 mm

Read/write signal
(2)
Original OUT sensor
(4)
Shading adjustment
83.4 mm
41 mm 100 ms (3 + b) mm
Flat bed read pulse motor
Feed
100 ms Return

Image scanner ADF 100 ms


8 mm
shading sensor (7 + a - b) mm

* L = paper size specified in user settings (mm)


Adjustment value a = Test mode No. 183 (ADF scanning mirror position adjustment)
Adjustment value b = Test mode No. 184 (ADF-ABC mirror position adjustment)

(1) “A10-108” is displayed if the Original IN sensor is not activated (light path blocked) even when the
ADF read pulse motor transports the original 138 mm after the START key is pressed.
(2) “A10-109” is displayed if the Original OUT sensor is not activated (light path blocked) even when the
ADF read pulse motor transports the original 117 mm after the Original IN sensor activates (light path
blocked).
(3) “A10-105” is displayed if the Original IN sensor is not deactivated (light path open). This occurs even
if the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 114 mm after the ADF original registration sensor
has deactivated (light path open).
(4) “A10-106” is displayed if the Original OUT sensor is not deactivated (light path open). This occurs
even if the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 117 mm after the Original IN sensor is
deactivated (light path open).

12 – 7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

Note: ABC stands for Automatic Base Control.

3. ADF Original Scanning Mechanism


Once the ADF original setting operation is complete, pressing the START key illuminates the lamp.
The Flat bed read pulse motor immediately activates, moving the Lamp carriage in the feed direction to
the shading position. Shading adjustment is performed before moving back in the return direction and
stopping at the normal ADF scanning position.
The ADF read pulse motor [M] meanwhile operates in the forward direction, rotating the Registration roller
[A], Original read roller [C], and Original ejection roller (top) [J] in the feed direction. The original is fed
forward 29.9 mm after the Original IN sensor [E] activates (light path blocked), activating the read/write
signal and initiating a scan of the original. (The pickup roller returns to the standby position.)
The read/write signal is deactivated a preset interval after the Original IN sensor [E] is deactivated (light
path open) when the original is moved away (or immediately if the Write pulse motor has rotated the
equivalent of the paper size as previously specified in the user settings). The ADF read pulse motor [M]
then operates at high speed as soon as scanning is complete.
Once the original is transported a preset distance after the Original OUT sensor [I] deactivates, the ADF
read pulse motor [M] stops. This completes the ADF original scanning operation.

I
C
J
E

Original G
feed

K D
F

12 – 8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

M C A

L K I

A: Registration roller I: Original OUT sensor


B: Registration driven roller J: Original ejection roller (top)
C: Original read roller K: Original ejection roller (bottom)
D: Original read driven roller L: Original receiving tray
E: Original IN sensor M: ADF read pulse motor
F: Reflecting plate
G: Shading plate
H: ADF stage glass

12 – 9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

START key ON End

Lamp

ADF read pulse motor Forward High


speed
ADF original
registration sensor
(1) (3)

Original IN sensor
29.9 mm

Read/write signal
(2)
Original OUT sensor
(4)
Shading adjustment
83.4 mm
41 mm

Flat bed read pulse motor


Feed
Return
100 ms

Image scanner ADF shading 100 ms


8 mm
sensor (10 + a) mm

* L = paper size specified in user settings (mm)


Adjustment value a = Test mode No. 183 (ADF scanning mirror position adjustment)

(1) “A10-108” is displayed if the Original IN sensor is not activated (light path blocked) even when the
ADF read pulse motor transports the original 138 mm after the START key is pressed.
(2) “A10-109” is displayed if the Original OUT sensor is not activated (light path blocked). This occurs
even when the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 117 mm after the Original IN sensor is
activated (light path blocked).
(3) “A10-105” is displayed if the Original IN sensor is not deactivated (light path open). This occurs even
if the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 114 mm after the ADF original registration sensor
is deactivated (light path open).
(4) “A10-106” is displayed if the Original OUT sensor is not deactivated (light path open). This occurs
even if the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 117 mm after the Original IN sensor is
deactivated (light path open).

12 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE ORIGINAL SCRAPER ASS’Y

Removal and Assembly


1. Removing the Original Scraper Ass’y
(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove the
ADF cover [A]. Finally, close the ADF unit.
(2) Remove the plastic lock rings [C] from both sides of the Original scraper ass’y [B], and then remove
the bearing bushes [D]. Lift up the Original stopper gate [E] to remove the Original scraper ass’y.

12 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE ORIGINAL SCRAPER ASS’Y

E
B

D
D

C
C

A: ADF cover
B: Original Scraper Ass’y
C: Lock ring
D: Bearing bush
E: Original stopper gate

12 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE PICKUP ROLLER

2. Removing the Pickup Roller


(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove the
ADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.
(2) Pull apart both ends of the Pickup roller frame ass’y [B] holding the Pickup roller [A], and remove the
Pickup roller [A]. (Take care not to drop the washer on the right-hand side gear of the Pickup roller.)

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Do not forget to insert the washer on the right-hand side gear on the Pickup roller.

B A B

A: Pickup roller
B: Pickup roller frame ass’y

12 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE ORIGINAL STRIPPER ROLLER

3. Removing the Original Stripper Roller


(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove the
ADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.
(2) Remove the Original Scraper Ass’y. (See this chapter.)
(3) Remove the Pickup roller, (see this chapter.) and then remove the Intermediate guide [A].
(4) Remove the plastic Lock ring [C] on the left-hand side of the Original stripper roller [B], move the
Original stripper roller [B] to the left, and then remove the right-hand E-ring [D]. Move the Pickup roller
frame ass’y (right) [E] to the left, pull out the Pin [F] and then remove it to the right. (Take care not to
drop the washer fitted to the gear side of the Original stripper roller.)

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Fit the gear on the right-hand side as shown in the photograph, as the Original scraper roller
contains a one-way clutch. Also, do not forget to insert the washer on the gear side.
• When engaging the pin into the Pickup roller frame ass’y (right), insert it into the shallower slot.

A G

C D E F

A: Intermediate guide
B: Original stripper roller
C: Lock ring
D: E-ring
E: Pickup roller frame ass’y (right)
F: Pin
G: ADF timing belt

12 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE ADF ORIGINAL DETECTION, ORIGINAL IN, AND ORIGINAL OUT SENSORS

4. Removing the ADF Original Detection, Original IN, and Original


OUT Sensors
(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove
the ADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.

Removing the ADF Original Detection Sensor


(2) Remove the connector, free the actuator by hand, and release the clips on the ADF original
detection sensor [A] to remove it.

Removing the Original IN Sensor


(2) Remove the connector, remove the screw (M3 x 10), and then remove the Original IN sensor [B].
* After removing it, turn variable resistor VR1 on top of the ADF-PCB [C] to readjust LED1 to
maximum brightness.

Removing the Original OUT Sensor


(2) Remove the connector, free the actuator by hand, and release the clips on the Original OUT
sensor [D] to remove it.

A B

C
D

A: ADF original detection sensor


B: Original IN sensor
C: ADF-PCB
D: Original OUT sensor

12 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE ADF ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR

5. Removing the ADF Original Registration Sensor


(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove the
ADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.
(2) Remove the connector, lift up the actuator and move it to the left end, and release the clips on the
ADF original registration sensor [A] to remove it.

A: ADF original registration sensor

12 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE ADF READ PULSE MOTOR

6. Removing the ADF Read Pulse Motor


(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove the
ADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.
(2) Detach connectors CN1 and CN3 on the ADF-PCB [A], and remove the ground screw [C] on the ADF
upper guide ass’y [B] together with the other screws (M3 x 6). (Take care not to drop the rosette
washer fitted beneath the ground screw.)
(3) Remove the ADF upper guide ass’y [B] and four screws (M3 x 6).
(4) Remove the ADF read pulse motor [D] and two screws (M3 x 6).

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• When mounting the ADF upper guide ass’y, engage the two aligning pins.
• When attaching the ground screw, do not forget to insert the rosette washer.
• After mounting the ADF upper guide ass’y, readjust the Original IN sensor. Turn variable resistor
VR1 on top of the ADF-PCB to readjust LED1 to maximum brightness.

D C E

12 – 17
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE ADF READ PULSE MOTOR

A: ADF-PCB
B: ADF upper guide ass’y
C: Ground screw
D: ADF read pulse motor
E: Original IN sensor

12 – 18
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE REGISTRATION ROLLER, ORIGINAL READ ROLLER, AND ORIGINAL EJECTION ROLLER (TOP)

7. Removing the Registration Roller, Original Read Roller, and


Original Ejection Roller (top)
(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove
the ADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.
(2) Detach connectors CN1 and CN3 on the ADF-PCB, and remove the ground screw on the ADF
upper guide ass’y and screws (M3 x 6). (Take care not to drop the rosette washer fitted beneath
the ground screw.)
(3) Remove the ADF upper guide ass’y [A] and four screws (M3 x 10).
(4) Lift up the Jam release dial [B] towards the top left to pull it out.
(5) Remove the Idler spring [G], loosen the two screws on the Idler [F], and then loosen the tension
on the ADF timing belt [H].
(6) Remove the three screws (M3 x 10) from both the ADF guide frame (front) [I] and ADF guide frame
(rear) [J], and then remove the frames.

Removing the Registration Roller


(7) Remove the front E-ring [P], rear E-ring [M], washer [K], thrust spring [L], and washer [K] (take
care, as the washer and thrust spring may fly out when the E-ring is removed). Next, pull out the
Timing gear [Q], which is protrudes onto the front flat face, and then remove the Registration roller
[C].

Removing the Original Read Roller


(7) Remove the front clutch spring [O], E-ring [P], rear E-ring [M], washer [K], thrust spring [L], and
washer [K] (take care, as the washer and thrust spring may fly out when the E-ring is removed).
Next, pull out the Timing gear [Q], which protrudes onto the front flat face, and then remove the
Original read roller [D].

Removing the Original Ejection Roller (top)


(7) Remove the front E-ring [P], rear E-ring [M], washer [K], thrust spring [L], and washer [K] (take
care, as the washer and thrust spring may fly out when the E-ring is removed). Next, pull out the
Timing gear [Q], which protrudes onto the front flat face, and then remove the Original Ejection
Roller (top) [E].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Insert the thrust spring at the rear of each roller, placing washers on either side, and securing the
assembly with the E-ring.
• Note the insertion direction of the lugs on each timing gear.
• Attach the ADF timing belt as shown in the photograph.
• Engage the three pins in each case when securing the ADF guide frame (front) and ADF guide
frame (rear). Also check that the bearing bushes are fitted correctly on each roller.
• After attaching the idler spring, the ADF timing belt tension is adjusted by loosening the two idler
screws.

12 – 19
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE REGISTRATION ROLLER, ORIGINAL READ ROLLER, AND ORIGINAL EJECTION ROLLER (TOP)

A
C

J I

D B

Rear Front

A: ADF upper guide ass’y


B: Jam release dial
C: Registration roller
D: Original read roller
E: Original Ejection Roller (top)
F: Idler
G: Idler spring
H: ADF timing belt
I: ADF guide frame (front)
J: ADF guide frame (rear)

12 – 20
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
REMOVING THE REGISTRATION ROLLER, ORIGINAL READ ROLLER, AND ORIGINAL EJECTION ROLLER (TOP)

Registration roller N

P Q N K L K

Original read roller N

M
O

P Q N K L K

N
Original ejection roller (top)

P Q N
K L K
Front Rear

K: Washer
L: Thrust spring
M: E-ring
N: Bearing bush
O: Clutch spring
P: E-ring
Q: Timing gear

12 – 21
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF SCAN START POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment
1. ADF Scan Start Position Adjustment
Checks and procedure
(1) Make a master with the ADF unit using an original with no blank margin at the top, and print.
(2) Examine the prints to check that the scanning start position is at 5 mm ± 2 mm from the top of the
original.
(3) If the position is outside the specified parameters, adjust using test mode No. 186 (ADF
scanning start position adjustment).

12 – 22
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF HORIZONTAL SCAN POSITION ADJUSTMENT

2. ADF Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment


Checks and procedure
(1) Place a sheet of B4 size paper on the paper feed tray, and make a master of test chart No. 15
using the ADF unit.
(2) Examine the master created on the print drum, and check that pattern “e” on the left and right of
the original is not missing.
(3) If the pattern is missing, adjust using test mode No. 185 (ADF main scanning left/right
adjustment).

12 – 23
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF READ PULSE MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT (IMAGE ELONGATION & SHRINKAGE ADJUSTMENT)

3. ADF Read Pulse Motor Speed Adjustment (Image Elongation &


Shrinkage Adjustment)
Before adjusting, first adjust the image elongation and shrinkage using the Write pulse motor speed
adjustment (See chapter 13.)

Checks and procedure


(1) Place a sheet of B4 size paper on the paper feed tray, and make a master of test chart No. 15
using the ADF unit.
(2) Lay the print on top of the original to check that the image elongation and shrinkage is within
±1.4% at the 310-mm line.
(3) If the elongation and shrinkage is outside the specified parameters, adjust using test mode No.
187 (ADF scanning Image Elongation & Shrinkage Adjustment).

12 – 24
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ORIGINAL IN SENSOR SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT

4. Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment


Procedure
(1) Open the ADF unit, remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and then remove the ADF cover. Finally,
close the ADF unit.
(2) Turn variable resistor VR1 on top of the ADF-PCB to adjust LED1 to maximum brightness.

Checks after adjustment


• Check that LED1 on top of the ADF-PCB clears when the original (thin Riso paper inlet) is detected
by the Original IN sensor.

12 – 25
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION
ADF IMAGE SKEW ADJUSTMENT

5. ADF Image Skew Adjustment


Checks and procedure
(1) Place a sheet of B4 size paper on the paper feed tray, and make a master of test chart No. 15
using the ADF unit.
(2) Lay the print on top of the original with the 310-mm lines at the side parallel, and check that the
skew (X) of the leading 160-mm line is within 2 mm.
(3) If the skew is outside the specified parameters, adjust as follows.
• Remove the screw (M4 x 6) on the ADF mount plate [A], rotate through 180° to open the ADF unit
to 90°, and then loosen the two ADF unit retaining screws (M4 x 10).
• Loosen the nut [B] on the hinge assembly (right), and turn the ADF slide screw [C] (clockwise if
as in Figure 2, and counter-clockwise if as in Figure 1) to adjust dimension T. Turning the screw
clockwise increases dimension T.
• Tighten the two ADF unit retaining screws, and then tighten the nuts with the ADF slide screw
secured.
• Make a master and print, and repeat the procedure from the beginning if the skew is still outside
the specified parameters.

A C

A: ADF mount plate


B: Nut T
C: ADF slide screw

X X

Bottom Top

Figure 1 Figure 2

12 – 26
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13: MASTER MAKING SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 13-2


1. Master making & master loading .......................................................................... 13-2
2. Scanner Table Set Detection Mechanism ............................................................. 13-4
3. Master Cutting Mechanism .................................................................................... 13-5
4. Thermal Print Head Elevation Mechanism ........................................................... 13-6
5. Master Positioning Mechanism ............................................................................. 13-8
6. Master Making ........................................................................................................ 13-9
Removal and Assembly .................................................................................................... 13-11
1. Removing the Write Roller .................................................................................... 13-11
2. Removing the Load Roller (bottom) .................................................................... 13-12
3. Removing the Cutter Unit .................................................................................... 13-14
4. Removing the Load Roller ................................................................................... 13-15
5. Removing the Thermal Print Head ...................................................................... 13-16
6. Removing the Master Loading Unit ..................................................................... 13-17
7. Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor .............................................................. 13-18
Adjustment ........................................................................................................................ 13-19
1. Thermal power of thermal print head .................................................................. 13-19
2. Master Feeding Adjustments .............................................................................. 13-20

13 – 1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
MASTER MAKING & MASTER LOADING

Mechanism
1. Master making & master loading
The master making & master loading mechanism is made up of the following components.
1) Scanner Table Set Detection Mechanism
The Flat bed set switch [A] confirms that the original is positioned on the scanner table.
The Master loading unit sensor [B] confirms that the master loading unit is set.
The Master end sensor [C] confirms that master roll has ran out of master.
2) Master Cutting Mechanism
The master cutting operation is performed by the Cutter motor [D], and the cutter motor stop position
is confirmed by the Cutter home position switch [E].
3) Thermal Print Head Elevation Mechanism
The Thermal print head (TPH) [F] is raised and lowered by the Thermal pressure motor [G], and the
position is confirmed by the TPH pressure sensor [H].
4) Master Making Section Mechanism
Master making is performed by lowering the Thermal print head [F] and transporting the master
clamped between it and the Write roller [I]. The master is transported by the Write roller, which is
driven by the Write pulse motor [J]. Created masters are stored inside the master stocker [K].
5) Master Loading Mechanism
Masters that have been created are fed to the print drum and clamped, and then loaded by rotating
the print drum.
The master is transported by the Load roller [M], which is driven by the Load pulse motor [L].

13 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
MASTER MAKING & MASTER LOADING

M
N

I O
E
D

K
C

J L

A: Flat bed set switch I: Write roller


B: Master loading unit sensor J: Write pulse motor
C: Master end sensor K: Master stocker
D: Cutter motor L: Load pulse motor
E: Cutter home position switch M: Load roller
F: Thermal print head N: Master detection sensor
G: Thermal pressure motor O: Master positioning sensor
H: TPH pressure sensor

13 – 3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
SCANNER TABLE SET DETECTION MECHANISM

2. Scanner Table Set Detection Mechanism


Scanner table and master loading set detection mechanism
The Flat bed set switch [A] confirms that the scanner table is closed.
The Flat bed set switch [A] is the interlocking switch for the main motor, and this forces the Main motor,
Clamp motor, and TPH power to an emergency stop if the Scanner table is opened while the system is
operating.
The Master loading unit switch [B] confirms that the Master loading unit is set, and the master setting
operation is performed once the Master loading unit is set.

Master end detection


The end of the master roll is confirmed by the Master end sensor [C] detecting the black end mark
attached to the end of the master on the master roll.
The Master end sensor [C] checks every 10 ms while the master is being transported, and gives an
indication on the panel when the end mark is detected twice in succession.

A: Flat bed set switch


B: Master loading unit switch
C: Master end sensor

13 – 4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
MASTER CUTTING MECHANISM

3. Master Cutting Mechanism


• The master is cut by the upper cutter of the Cutter unit being moved up and down by the Cutter motor [A].
• The Cutter motor rotates in a constant direction, and the Cutter home position switch [B] confirms the
position of the upper cutter.
• The Cutter is at the home position when it is not pressing against the Cutter home position switch [B],
and if the switch is depressed briefly after the Cutter motor starts, the motor stops when the switch is no
longer depressed.

Cutter unit home position

A: Cutter motor
B: Cutter home position switch

13 – 5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
THERMAL PRINT HEAD ELEVATION MECHANISM

4. Thermal Print Head Elevation Mechanism


Thermal print head elevation
When the system is on standby or when winding the master onto the print drum after master making,
the Thermal print head is raised from the Write roller. Conversely, for master making and during
transport, the Thermal print head is lowered and pressed onto the Write roller.
The Thermal print head is raised and lowered by the Pressure release cam [B], which is driven by the
Thermal pressure motor [A].
The Pressure release cam [B] is an eccentric cam, which raises and lowers the TPH pivot plate [C] as
it rotates. The raised and lowered stop positions for the motor are detected by the TPH pressure
sensor [E], which is blocked by the Pressure detection disc [D]. The Sliding plate [F] and Blade link [G]
are also moved by the vertical action of the thermal head.

Thermal print head raised position


In the Thermal print head raised position, the Load roller No. 1 (top) [H] and Load roller (top) [I] also
rise.
At the same time, the Blade cushion [J] descends, and applies back tension to the master while it is
being wound onto the print drum to prevent creases in the master.

Thermal print head’s lowered position


In the Thermal print head lowered position, the Load roller No. 1 (top) [H] and Load roller (top) [I] also
descend to allow the master to be transported. At the same time, the Blade cushion [J] rises.

Initialization
This moves the Thermal print head to the pressure release (raised) position when power is switched
on, or when everything is reset.

Loading guide plate operation


• In the clamp plate master release operation at the start of master ejection, the front edge of the
Loading guide plate is raised by the Master release bar to prevent it from obstructing the leading
edge of the freed master on the drum.
• In the clamp plate master clamping operation at the start of master loading, only the front edge
sheet of the Loading guide plate is raised by the Clamp plate, so as to prevent it from obstructing
the master loading operation.
• During master loading, the master being loaded is back-tensioned by the sponge fitted to the
bottom of the front edge sheet of the Loading guide plate.

13 – 6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
THERMAL PRINT HEAD ELEVATION MECHANISM

A D H
E G I
F

A: Thermal pressure motor H: Load roller No. 1 (top)


B: Pressure release cam I: Load roller (top)
C: TPH pivot plate J: Blade cushion
D: Pressure detection disc K: Loading guide plate
E: TPH pressure sensor
F: Sliding plate
G: Blade link

13 – 7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
MASTER POSITIONING MECHANISM

5. Master Positioning Mechanism


The master positioning operation is performed to bring the master to the Master positioning sensor when
opening or closing the Master loading unit or during master making.

For master roll replacement


(1) • Insert the leading edge of the new master roll to the Master stopper gate [A], and close the master
loading unit.
• Closing the Master loading unit raises the Master stopper gate.
• The Master loading unit switch monitors operations every 10 ms and determines that the Master
loading unit is closed when the light path is blocked twice in succession. The master is then
checked by the Master detection sensor [B].
(2) • The Thermal print head is lowered by the Thermal pressure motor, and the Write pulse motor and
Load pulse motor operate to transport the master to the Master positioning sensor [C].
(3) • Once the light path to the Master positioning sensor [C] is blocked by the master, the Write pulse
motor alone operates in reverse to return the master 2 mm. The motor then stops and the
Thermal print head is raised.

For master cutting


Steps (2) to (3) above are performed following master cutting.

B C

A: Master stopper gate


B: Master detection sensor
C: Master positioning sensor

13 – 8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
MASTER MAKING

6. Master Making
The sequence of operations from master making to master mounting is as described below.

(1) At the start of master making, the Thermal


print head is lowered to clamp the master
between it and the Write roller.

(2) The write pulse motor and Load pulse


motor operate to transport the master to
the Master positioning sensor, where it
waits for scanning system preparations to
be completed.

(3) Once master making can be started, the


Write pulse motor operates to transport the
master to the writing start position before
master making commences. The master
created is then stored in the master
stocker.

(4) Once the master making in step (3) starts,


the Load pulse motor operates to transport
the leading edge of the master to the
clamp plate, where it is clamped.

(5) Once master making is finished, the


Thermal print head is raised, and the print
drum rotates as the master is wound onto
it.

13 – 9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
MASTER MAKING

(6) The print drum pauses at the 220°


position, where the master is cut.

(7) After the print drum has rotated a further


15°, the Master positioning sensor
confirms that the master has been cut.
Cutting has been performed correctly if the
light path to the sensor is blocked (no
master).
If the light path to the sensor is open, it is
determined that an error has occurred.
In this case, the cutting operation is
repeated, the Master positioning sensor
confirms whether the master has been cut
after the print drum has rotated a further
15°. If it is cut, “A03 Cutting error” is
displayed, and if it is not cut, “T13 Cutter
motor lock” is displayed.

(8) The master setting operation is performed.

13 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
REMOVING THE WRITE ROLLER

Rmoval and Assembly


1. Removing the Write Roller
(1) Switch off the power, and remove the rear cover.
(2) Loosen the mounting bracket screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) on the Write pulse motor [B], and remove the
Belt [C].
(3) Remove the Pulley [D]. (M2 x 6: 1 pc)
(4) Remove the Bearing stopper [E] and pull out the bearing. (M4 x 6: 1 pc)
(5) Pull out the Write roller [A].

[Precautions on Reassembly]
• Take care not to drop the bearing when mounting the Write roller (particularly the front).

D
E

A: Write roller
B: Write pulse motor
C: Belt
D: Pulley
E: Bearing stopper

13 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
REMOVING THE LOAD ROLLER (BOTTOM)

2. Removing the Load Roller (bottom)


(1) Switch off the power, and remove the rear cover.
(2) Loosen the screw (M4 x 8: 1 pc) on the Tension assembly [B], loosen the mounting bracket screws
(M4 x 8: 2 pcs) on the Load pulse motor [C], and then remove the belt.
(3) Remove the Pulley [D]. (M2 x 6: 1 pc)
(4) Remove the Bearing fixing plate [E] and pull out the bearing. (M4 x 8: 1 pc)
* Removing the rear bearing here simplifies subsequent disassembly or reassembly work.

A: Load roller (bottom)


B: Tension assembly
C: Load pulse motor
D: Pulley
E: Bearing fixing plate

13 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
REMOVING THE LOAD ROLLER (BOTTOM)

(5) Remove the master roll, and remove the Master cover [F]. (M4 x 6: 1 pc)
(6) Remove the Master holders [G] on both sides. (M3 x 6: 2 pcs each)
(7) Remove the Master set guide [H]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

H
G

F: Master cover
G: Master holder
H: Master set guide

(8) Unplug the rear connector, and remove the Stocker cover [I]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)
(9) Remove the springs on both sides, and then remove the Master guide [J].
(10) Remove the Load roller guide [K] (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), and then remove the Load roller (bottom).

I: Stocker cover
J: Master guide
K: Load roller guide

13 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
REMOVING THE CUTTER UNIT

3. Removing the Cutter Unit


(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and pull out the print drum.
(2) Unplug the rear connector, and remove the Cutter cover [A]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

(3) Remove the Cutter guide plate [C]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)


(4) Remove the cutter unit mounting screws. (2 pcs)
(5) Loosen the Tension assembly [D] screw, detach the Belt [F], unplug the cutter unit connector [E], and
then remove the Cutter unit.

A: Cutter cover
F
B: Load guide (tip)
C: Cutter guide plate
D: Tension assembly
E: Cutter unit connector
F: Belt

13 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
REMOVING THE LOAD ROLLER

4. Removing the Load Roller


(1) Perform steps (1) to (4) to remove the cutter unit.
(2) Remove the Loading guide (bottom) [E]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)
(3) Loosen the screw (M4 x 8: 1 pc) on the Tension assembly [A], and remove the Belt [F].
(4) Remove the Pulley [B] (M2 x 6: 1 pc) and Bearing fixing plate [C] (M4 x 8: 1 pc).
(5) Remove the Load roller [D].

A B

A: Tension assembly
B: Pulley
C: Bearing fixing plate
D: Load roller
E: Loading guide (bottom)
F: Belt

13 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
REMOVING THE THERMAL PRINT HEAD

5. Removing the Thermal Print Head


(1) Lift up the Master loading unit, and remove the Master loading unit bottom cover [A]. (Screws only
need be loosened.)
(2) Remove the mounting screws on the TPH bracket [B]. (M3 x 6: 2 pcs)
(3) Remove the ground lead mounting screw. (M3 x 6: 1 pc)
(4) Unplug the two connectors, and remove the Thermal print head together with the TPH bracket.

A: Master loading unit bottom cover


B: TPH bracket

13 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
REMOVING THE MASTER LOADING UNIT

6. Removing the Master Loading Unit


(1) Move the Scanner table unit to the servicing position [A].
(2) Remove the Master loading unit upper cover [D]. (M3 x 6: 4 pcs)
(3) Remove the wire harness and ground wire [C], and place them on the Master loading unit.
(4) Open the Master disposal gate housing [B] as wide as possible. (Secure with a piece of cord or
something similar.)
(5) With the Master loading unit opened as wide as possible, unhook the Springs [E] on both sides.
(6) Lift up the Master loading unit and remove.

A: Servicing position
B: Master disposal gate housing E
C: Wire harness and ground lead
D: Master loading unit upper cover
E: Spring (on both sides)

13 – 17
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
REMOVING THE THERMAL PRESSURE MOTOR

7. Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor


(1) Remove the Master loading unit.
(2) Remove the E-rings and bearings, and then remove the Load roller No. 1 (top) [A].
(3) Remove the De-electricity brush plate [B]. (M3 x 6: 2 pcs)
(4) Remove the Thermal pressure motor [C] as a unit. (M3 x 6: 4 pcs)

B
A

A: Load roller No. 1 (top)


B: De-electricity brush plate
C: Thermal pressure motor

13 – 18
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
THERMAL POWER OF THERMAL PRINT HEAD

Adjustment
1. Thermal power of thermal print head
The thermal power must always be set before making masters after the Thermal print head has been
replaced.

Procedure
(1) Switch off the power to the system.
(2) Connect a multimeter across pin 1 (+) and pin 3 (-) of CN108 on the Power supply unit.
(3) Run test mode No. 238. (Switch the thermal print head voltage on/off using the START/STOP
keys.)
(4) Check that the voltage reading on the voltmeter corresponds to the thermal print head
resistances shown in the setting table.
(5) If different, adjust using VR301 (coarse adjustment) and VR302 (fine adjustment) on the Power
supply unit.

Precautions During Setting


• Adjustments must be made after the Thermal print head has been installed.
• A voltage will not be applied across the Thermal print head unless the Scanner table is positioned
and test mode No. 238 is run.

Setting table
Thermal print head resistance (Ohm) Voltage (V)
1403--1413 15.9
1414--1431 16.0
1432--1449 16.1
1450--1467 16.2
1468--1485 16.3
1486--1503 16.4
1504--1522 16.5
1523--1540 16.6
1541--1559 16.7
1560--1577 16.8
1578--1596 16.9
1597--1615 17.0
1616--1634 17.1
1635--1653 17.2
1654--1672 17.3
1673--1692 17.4
1693--1711 17.5
1712--1731 17.6
1732--1750 17.7
1751--1770 17.8
1771--1790 17.9
1791--1810 18.0
1811--1830 18.1
1831--1850 18.2
1851--1871 18.3
1872--1891 18.4
1892--1898 18.5

13 – 19
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
MASTER FEEDING ADJUSTMENTS

2. Master Feeding Adjustments


1) Master cut position adjustment
This adjustment sets the master cutting timing (print drum stop position for cutting).
Checks and procedure
(1) Adjust if the tail end of the master mounted on the print drum is either too long or too short.
(2) Run test mode No. 284 to adjust.
Setting range: -100 to +100 (-10.0° to +10.0°)
Setting units: 1 (0.1°)
Default: 0 (±0°)
Increasing the settings increases the length of each master.

2) Master clamp range adjustment


Adjust the master clamp range when it is mounted.
Checks and procedure 2±2
Clamp magnet plate mm
(1) Make a normal and confidential master, and then
check the length of the master protruding from the
Clamp magnet plate. Master
If the amount protruding is within 2 mm ±2 mm, it is
normal. If it is outside this range, adjust as shown
below.
(2) Run test mode No. 283 and adjust.
Setting range: -100 to +100 (-10.0 mm to +10.0
mm)
Setting units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0 (±0 mm)
Increasing the settings increases the amount of
protrusion.
Note:
The relative positioning of already-made masters wound onto the print drum will change if the
clamp range is adjusted. The master scanning start position must therefore be readjusted, and it
must also be confirmed that the Vertical printing position adjustment is correct.

3) Master making image elongation/


shrinkage adjustment
Adjust the Write pulse motor speed for master making.
Checks and procedure
(1) Run test mode No. 051 Test print (mesh), and
produce an actual print.
Printing is correct if the length of three blocks
horizontally is the same as that for four blocks
vertically. (Check by folding paper and illuminating
from behind.) If it is not correct, adjust as shown
below.
(2) Run test mode No. 287 and adjust.
Setting range: -50 to +50 (-5.0% to +5.0%)
Setting units: 1 (0.1%)
Default: 0 (±0%)
Increasing the settings elongates the image.
Note:
The vertical printing position must be readjusted after
adjusting the elongation/shrinkage.

13 – 20
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION
MASTER FEEDING ADJUSTMENTS

4) Write start position adjustment


Adjust the write start position (distance from master positioning sensor ON to read/write signal
ON).
Adjustment for a leading edge margin of 5 mm assuming that the master clamp range has been
correctly adjusted.
Checks and procedure
(1) Run test mode No. 050 Test print (check pattern), to confirm that the master clamp range is
correctly adjusted.
(2) Cover the print drum surface, aligning the leading edge of the paper with the print drum support
marks on either side as shown in the diagram, and then transfer the ink to the paper by rubbing
from above.
The position is correct if the leading edge margin is 5 mm. If it is not correct, adjust as shown
below.
(3) Run test mode No. 281 and adjust.
Setting range: -30 to + 50 (-3.0 mm to +5.0 mm)
Setting units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0 (±0 mm)
Increasing the settings lowers the write start position and increases the size of the paper
leading-edge margin, moving the printing area downward.

Print drum supports on both sides

Paper
Clamp plate
Mark
5 mm

Paper
Printing area
Printing area

5) Master making length adjustment


Adjust the master making area (scanning length)
Adjustment for a bottom edge margin of 2 mm assuming Master
that the master clamp range has been correctly adjusted.
Checks and procedure
(1) Run test mode No. 050 Test print (Check pattern),
remove the master created from the print drum, and
measure the length.
The master is correct if the length is 357 mm. If it is 製版面
Master making area 357 mm
not correct, adjust as shown below.
(2) Run test mode No. 282 and adjust.
Setting range: -100 to +100 (-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm)
Setting units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0 (±0 mm)
Increasing the settings increases the length of the
master making area.

13 – 21
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14: TIMING CHARTS

Contents

Initialization Operations ..................................................................................................... 14-2


1. Overall Initialization Operation ............................................................................... 14-2
2. Individual Initialization Operations ......................................................................... 14-2
[Thermal Print Head Initialization Operation] ........................................................ 14-2
[Master Compression Plate Initialization Operation] ............................................ 14-3
[Clamp Unit Home Positioning Operation] ........................................................... 14-3
[Vertical Printing Position Initialization Operation] ................................................. 14-4
[Pressure Initialization Operation] ......................................................................... 14-4
Printing Operations ............................................................................................................ 14-5
1. Normal Overall Printing Operation ........................................................................ 14-5
2. Individual Printing Operations ............................................................................... 14-6
[Print Start Operation] ............................................................................................. 14-6
[Print In Progress - End Operation] ....................................................................... 14-8
[Three-Cycle No-Paper Pickup Operation] ............................................................ 14-9
3. Elevator Operations ............................................................................................. 14-10
[Elevator Raise Operation] ................................................................................... 14-10
[Elevator Lower Operation] ................................................................................... 14-11
[Elevator Servo Operation] ................................................................................... 14-12
4. Print Drum Peripheral Operations ....................................................................... 14-13
[Clamp Release] .................................................................................................. 14-13
[Master Clamp Operation] ................................................................................... 14-13
[Inking Operation (No Ink Detection)] .................................................................. 14-14
[Inking Operation (Overflow Detection)] ............................................................... 14-14
[Print Drum Solenoid Lock Release] ................................................................... 14-15
5. Print Adjustment Operations ............................................................................... 14-16
[Print Speed Change] .......................................................................................... 14-16
[Print Intensity Change] ........................................................................................ 14-16
[Vertical Print Positioning Operation] ................................................................... 14-17
Master Removal Operations ............................................................................................ 14-18
1. Overall Timing for Normal Master Creation ........................................................ 14-18
2. Individual Master Removal Operations ............................................................... 14-19
[Removed Master Vertical Transport Operation] ................................................. 14-19
[Disposed Master Compressing Operation] ....................................................... 14-20
Master Making Operation ................................................................................................ 14-21
1. Overall Timing for Normal Master Creation ........................................................ 14-21
2. Individual Master Making Operation .................................................................... 14-22
[Thermal Print Head Compression Operation] ................................................... 14-22
[Thermal Print Head Release Operation] ........................................................... 14-22
[Master Positioning Operation] ............................................................................ 14-23
[Master Cutting Operation] ................................................................................... 14-24
[Master Making Operation] ................................................................................... 14-25

14 – 1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
OVERALL INITIALIZATION OPERATION

Initialization Operations
1. Overall Initialization Operation
Returns the following items to their home positions when the power is switched on or when everything is
reset.

Initialization start Initialization end

Thermal print head

Master compression plate

Vertical/horizontal printing position not


Clamp unit
initialized if clamping error occurs.

Vertical printing position

Pressure control

2. Individual Initialization Operations


[Thermal Print Head Initialization Operation]

Start End

Start1 Start2

TPH pressure ON
sensor (1) OFF: Start2–
OFF

Compress
(3)
Thermal OFF End
pressure 100 ms
Release
motor
(2)
Max 250 ms (Error: 207) Max 1 s (Error: 208)

When ON: TPH pressure sensor: Blocked

(1) The TPH pressure sensor is checked on starting, and the operation starts from Start 1 if it is ON, and
from Start 2 if it is OFF. At Start 1, the thermal pressure motor operates in the compressing direction
until the TPH pressure sensor goes OFF.
(2) A time-out occurs at 250 ms here, and error message [T19-207] is displayed.
(3) The thermal pressure motor operates in the release direction until the TPH pressure sensor goes
ON.
A time-out occurs at 1 s here, and error message [T19-208] is displayed.
(4) Initialization ends once the TPH pressure sensor goes ON.

14 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL INITIALIZATION OPERATIONS

[Master Compression Plate Initialization Operation]

Start End
(1)

Master removal ON
sensor OFF
Master compre- ON
ssion sensor OFF (3)

Disposal box ON
full sensor OFF
Master ON
removal motor OFF
Master Compress
Max 400 ms Max 7 s 100 ms
compression OFF
START2 (Error: 305)
motor 100 ms (2)
Return
100 ms
Max 840 ms
To return
Start1 Start2 process
When ON: Master removal sensor: Open, Master compression sensor: Open, Disposal box full sensor:
Open
(1) The master compression sensor is checked on starting, and the operation starts from Start 1 if it is
ON, and from Start 2 if it is OFF. At Start 1, the master compression motor operates in the
compressing direction until the master compression sensor goes OFF.
A time-out occurs at 400 ms here, and the process moves to Start 2.
(2) The master compression motor operates in the return direction until the master compression sensor
goes ON.
A time-out occurs at 7 s here, and error message [T12-305] is displayed.
(3) Initialization ends once the master compression sensor goes ON and the master compression motor
stops.

Start (1) End (2)

ON
Clamp sensor A
OFF
ON
Clamp sensor B
OFF

Forward
(1) Max 3 s
Clamp motor OFF
(Error: 501) (3) Max 13 s 320 ms 100 ms
Reverse
(Error: 502)

When ON: Clamp sensor A: Blocked, Clamp sensor B: Blocked

[Clamp Unit Home Positioning Operation]


(1) On starting, the system checks that clamp sensor A and clamp sensor B are both OFF. If either is
ON, clamp initialization is performed.
If the clamp sensors do not change even after the clamp motor operates, a time-out occurs at 3 s,
and the error message [T03-501] is displayed.
(2) Initialization ends once both clamp sensor A and clamp sensor B are OFF.
(3) A time-out occurs at 13 s if both the sensors do not go OFF after the clamp motor operates, and error
message [T03-502] is displayed.

14 – 3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL INITIALIZATION OPERATIONS

[Vertical Printing Position Initialization Operation]

Start End
(1)

Vertical ON
centering
sensor OFF ON: Start2–

Print Up
(2) (3)
positioning OFF
pulse motor Down
Max 18 mm Max 18 mm
100 ms 100 ms
(Error: 603) (Error: 604)
HOLD
A mm

Start1 Start2
When ON: Vertical centering sensor: Blocked

(1) The vertical centering sensor is checked on starting, and the operation starts from Start 1 if it is OFF,
and from Start 2 if it is ON. At Start 1, the print positioning pulse motor operates in the upward
direction until the vertical centering sensor goes ON.
A time-out occurs at 18 mm here, and error message [T05-603] is displayed.
(2) The print positioning pulse motor operates in the downward direction until the vertical centering
sensor goes OFF.
A time-out occurs at 18 mm here, and error message [T05-604] is displayed.
(3) The print positioning pulse motor operates in the upward direction once again, and then moves the
equivalent of A mm after the vertical centering sensor goes ON, before stopping. (A = 0.25 mm +
value set in Test mode No. 680)

[Pressure Initialization Operation]


Start End
(1)

Print pressure ON
control sensor OFF ON: Start2–

Compress
Pressure (2) (3)
control motor OFF
Release
Max 5.4 kg (6 s) Max 5.4 kg (6 s)
100 ms 100 ms
(Error: 600) (Error: 601)
HOLD
B mm

Start1 Start2
When ON: Print pressure control sensor: Blocked
(1) The print pressure control sensor is checked on starting, and the operation starts from Start 1 if it is
OFF, and from Start 2 if it is ON. At Start 1, the pressure control motor operates in the direction of
compression until the print pressure control sensor goes ON.
A time-out occurs at 12 mm here, and error message [T11-600] is displayed.
(2) The pressure control motor operates in the release direction until the print pressure control sensor
goes OFF.
A time-out occurs at 12 mm here, and error message [T11-601] is displayed.
(3) The pressure control motor operates in the direction of compression once again, and then moves the
equivalent of B mm after the print pressure control sensor goes ON, before stopping. (B = 0.25 mm +
value set in Test mode No. 682)
14 – 4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
NORMAL OVERALL PRINTING OPERATION

Printing Operations
1. Normal Overall Printing Operation

Elevator Servo operation

Print drum Master check

Ink Inking, overflow detection

Vertical printing
Reset Vertical adjustment
position
Print pressure
Adjustment due to speed/temperature variations and intensity adjustment
change

Print start

Print in progress

Pressure
release

14 – 5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL PRINTING OPERATIONS

2. Individual Printing Operations


[Print Start Operation]

To printing-in-
progress
Print start process

Print drum 0° 40° A° B° C° 180° D° 0°


angle

Paper Paper
detection at detected
press section No paper
Position A ON
sensor
OFF
Paper sensor ON (1)
(6)
OFF
Paper ON (1)
receiving (7)
sensor OFF
Paper ON
detection (4)
sensor OFF
Paper ejection ON
motor overload
current OFF

(2)

Main motor ON
(1)
OFF
Paper feed ON
clutch (5)
OFF (4)
Pressure ON
solenoid
OFF
(3)
Paper ejection ON
motor
OFF (1)
Suction fan ON
OFF (1)
Separation fan ON

OFF (1)
Copy count ON
signal
OFF

When ON: Position A sensor: Blocked, Paper sensor: Blocked, Paper receiving sensor: Open, Paper detection
sensor: Open

14 – 6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL PRINTING OPERATIONS

(1) The paper receiving sensor is checked on starting printing, and error message [A09-417] is
displayed if it is ON (paper jam from start).
The paper sensor is checked on starting printing, and error message [A07-418] is displayed if it is
ON (paper jam from start).
On starting printing, the main motor, paper ejection motor, suction fan, and separation fan are
switched ON.
The print drum initially rotates at speed 1 here, and increments by one speed level at the drum angle
of 220° for each sheet printed.
(2) The paper ejection motor overload current is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals, and error
message [T02-401] is given if is activated three times in succession.
(3) The pressure solenoid is activated at the drum angle of 40°, and subsequently remains ON until
printing ends.
(4) The paper detection sensor is checked at the drum angle of A°, and the paper feed clutch is activated
if paper is present.
Error message [C04-402] is displayed if no paper is present.
(A = 62° + value set in Test mode 481)
(5) The paper is transported, and the paper feed clutch is deactivated once the print drum has rotated B°
from when the paper is detected by the paper sensor.
(B = 21° + value set in Test modes 482–485 + adjustment for print drum speed)
(6) If the paper sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C, it
determines that no paper has been picked up, and moves to the three-cycle no-paper pickup
operation.
(C = 135° + value set in Test mode 486 + value set in Test mode 481)
(7) If the paper receiving sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to
angle D, it determines that a paper jam has occurred, and moves to the print-end operation.
The paper sensor is checked at 180° before the print drum stops, error message [A07-409] is
displayed if paper is present, and [A08-410] is displayed if there is no paper.
(D = 350° + value set in Test mode 487)

14 – 7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL PRINTING OPERATIONS

[Print In Progress - End Operation]

20° 270°
Print drum angle 0° A° 100° C° E° D° 0° 100° C° E° 0° 180° 0°

Paper detection at Paper


press section detected
No paper
Position A sensor ON
OFF

Paper sensor ON
(6) (7)
OFF (8) (8)
(7)
Paper receiving ON
sensor (9) (9)
OFF

Paper detection ON
(4)
sensor OFF
Main motor ON
OFF

Paper feed ON (5) B°


clutch
OFF
Pressure solenoid ON (10)
OFF
Paper ejection ON
motor
OFF
Suction fan ON
OFF

Separation fan ON
OFF

Copy count signal ON


OFF

(4) The paper detection sensor is checked at the drum angle, A, and the paper feed clutch is activated if
paper is present.
Error message [C04-402] is displayed if no paper is present. (A = 62° + value set in Test mode 481)
(5) The paper is transported, and the paper feed clutch is deactivated once the print drum has rotated B°
from when the paper is detected by the paper sensor. (B = 21° + value set in Test modes 482–485 +
adjustment for print drum speed)
(6) If the paper sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C, it
determines that no paper has been picked up, and moves to the three-cycle no-paper pickup
operation. (C = 135° + value set in Test mode 486 + value set in Test mode 481)
(7) If the paper receiving sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to
angle D, it determines that a paper jam has occurred, and moves to the print-end operation.
The paper sensor is checked at 180° before the print drum stops, error message [A07-409] is
displayed if paper is present, and [A08-410] is displayed if there is no paper. (D = 350° + value set in
Test mode 487)
(8) If the paper does not pass beyond the paper sensor by the time the print drum has rotated to 100°, it
determines that a paper jam has occurred, and moves to the print-end operation. Error message
[A07-413] is displayed.
(9) The paper receiving sensor is checked at the drum angle, E. If the paper is still present, it
determines that a paper jam has occurred, moves to the print-end operation, and error message
[A09-411] is displayed. If normal, the copy count is incremented. (E = 250° + value set in Test mode
488)
(10) On completion of printing, the pressure solenoid is deactivated when the print drum has rotated to angle
C.
(11) On the final revolution, the drum rotates at speed 1 at 20°, reducing to 30 rpm at 180° and 10 rpm at
270°. The main motor, paper receiving motor, suction fan, and separation fan stop once the print
drum is detected at position A.
14 – 8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL PRINTING OPERATIONS

[Three-Cycle No-Paper Pickup Operation]

Print drum angle 0° C° 0° C° 0° C° 0°

Paper Paper
detection at detected
press section No paper
Position A ON
sensor OFF

Paper sensor ON
(1) (2) (3)
OFF

Paper ON
receiving OFF
sensor
Paper ON
detection OFF
sensor
Main motor ON
OFF

Paper feed ON
clutch OFF

Pressure ON
solenoid
OFF
Paper ON
ejection
motor OFF
Suction fan ON
OFF
Separation
ON
fan
OFF
Copy count
ON
signal
OFF

(1) If the paper sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C, it
determines that no paper has been picked up, and moves to the three-cycle no-paper pickup
operation.
(C = 135° + value set in Test mode 486 + value set in Test mode 481)
(2) The paper feed operation is performed a second time, and returns to the normal operation if the
paper sensor detects the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C.
(3) The paper feed operation is performed a third time, and returns to the normal operation if the paper
sensor detects the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C. If paper is not detected, it
moves to the print-end operation, and error message [A07-412] is displayed.

14 – 9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
ELEVATOR OPERATIONS

3. Elevator Operations
[Elevator Raise Operation]

Start End

Upper limit ON (1)


sensor OFF
(2) Upper/lower limit sensors both ON (Error: 400)

Lower limit ON
sensor OFF
Elevator motor ON (3) ON three times in succession (Error: 401)
overload current OFF
Paper detection ON
sensor OFF (4) ON twice in succession (Error: 402)
Paper feed tray ON
safety switch (5) ON twice in succession (Error: 403)
OFF

100 ms 100 ms 100 ms

Elevator motor Raise (6) Max 2 s


OFF (Error: 404)
Lower
(7)
Max 12 s (Error: 405)
When ON: Upper limit sensor: Blocked, Lower limit sensor: Blocked, Paper detection sensor: Open

(1) The operation ends if the upper limit sensor is ON from the start.
If the upper limit sensor is OFF, the elevator operates until the upper limit sensor goes ON.
(2) Error message [T02-400] is displayed if both the upper and lower limit sensors are ON at the start.
(3) The elevator motor overload current is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator is
operating, and error message [T02-401] is displayed if an overload current is detected three times in
succession.
(4) The paper detection sensor is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator is
operating, and error message [C04-402] is displayed if no paper is detected twice in succession.
(5) The paper feed tray safety switch is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator is
operating, and error message [A06-403] is displayed if it is detected as OFF twice in succession.
(6) If the lower limit sensor takes more than 2 s to go OFF after the elevator starts, a time-out occurs,
and error message [T02-404] is displayed.
(7) If the upper limit sensor takes more than 12 s to go ON after the elevator starts, a time-out occurs,
and error message [T02-405] is displayed.

14 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
ELEVATOR OPERATIONS

[Elevator Lower Operation]

Start End
(1)

Upper limit ON
sensor OFF
Lower limit ON
sensor OFF
Elevator motor ON (2) ON three times in succession (Error: 401)
overload current OFF
Paper feed tray ON
safety switch (3) OFF twice in succession (Error: 403)
OFF

100 ms 100 ms 100 ms

Elevator motor Raise Max 12 s (Error: 407)


(5)
OFF Max 2 s (Error: 406)
(4)
Lower

When ON: Upper limit sensor: Blocked, Lower limit sensor: Blocked, Paper feed tray safety switch: Not
depressed

(1) The operation ends if the lower limit sensor is ON from the start.
If the lower limit sensor is OFF, the elevator operates until the lower limit sensor goes ON.
(2) The elevator motor overload current is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator is
operating, and error message [T02-401] is displayed if an overload current is detected three times in
succession.
(3) The paper feed tray safety switch is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator is
operating, and error message [A06-403] is displayed if it is detected as OFF twice in succession.
(4) If the upper limit sensor takes more than 2 s to go OFF after the elevator starts, a time-out occurs,
and error message [T02-406] is displayed.
(5) If the lower limit sensor takes more than 12 s to go ON after the elevator starts, a time-out occurs,
and error message [T02-407] is displayed.

14 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
ELEVATOR OPERATIONS

[Elevator Servo Operation]

Upper limit ON (1)


sensor OFF
(8) OFF more than 2 s in
succession (Error: 408)
Lower limit ON
sensor OFF
Elevator motor ON (2) ON three times in succession (Error: 401)
overload current OFF
Paper detection ON
sensor OFF (3) ON twice in succession (Error: 402)
Paper feed tray ON
safety switch OFF (4) ON twice in succession (Error: 403)

100 ms 100 ms 100 ms

Elevator motor Raise


(6)
OFF (5)
Lower 100 100
ms ms Controlled by H/W

At start of printing Elevator servo

When ON: Upper limit sensor: Blocked, Lower limit sensor: Blocked, Paper detection sensor: Open,
Paper feed tray safety switch: Depressed

(1) The operation ends if the upper limit sensor is ON from the start.
If the upper limit sensor is OFF, the elevator operates until the upper limit sensor goes ON.
(2) The elevator motor overload current is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator is
operating, and error message [T02-401] is displayed if an overload current is detected three times in
succession.
(3) The paper detection sensor is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator is
operating, and error message [C04-402] is displayed if no paper is detected twice in succession.
(4) The paper feed tray safety switch is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator is
operating, and error message [A06-403] is displayed if it is detected as OFF twice in succession.
(5) If the upper limit sensor goes ON, the elevator briefly descends until the upper limit sensor goes
OFF.
(6) The elevator then rises until the upper limit sensor goes ON again.
(7) The elevator servo operation is subsequently performed.
(8) If the upper limit sensor remains OFF for more than 2 s during the elevator servo operation, error
message [T02-408] is displayed.

14 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
PRINT DRUM PERIPHERAL OPERATIONS

4. Print Drum Peripheral Operations


[Clamp Release]

(2)
Clamp sensor A ON
OFF
Clamp sensor B ON
OFF

Max 3 s (Error: 503) (3) 280 ms

Max 5 s (Error: 504)

Clamp motor Forward


OFF (1)
100 ms
Reverse

When ON: Clamp sensor A: Blocked, Clamp sensor B: Blocked

(1) The clamp motor operates in the forward direction on starting.


(2) When clamp sensor B goes OFF with clamp sensor A ON, the clamp motor operates for a further 280
ms before stopping.
A time-out occurs at 5 s after the clamp motor starts, and error message [T03-504] is displayed.
(3) A time-out occurs and error message [T03-503] is displayed if clamp sensor B does not go ON
within 3 s of the clamp motor starting.

[Master Clamp Operation]

(2)

Clamp sensor ON
A OFF
Clamp sensor B ON
OFF
(3)
Max 3 s (Error: 505) 250 ms

Max 5 s (Error: 506)

Clamp motor Forward


OFF (1)
100 ms
Reverse

(1) The clamp motor operates in the forward direction on starting.


(2) When clamp sensor A goes OFF with clamp sensor B ON, the clamp motor operates for a further 250
ms before stopping.
A time-out occurs at 5 s after the clamp motor starts, and error message [T03-506] is displayed.
(3) A time-out occurs and error message [T03-505] is displayed if clamp sensor B does not go ON with
3 s of the clamp motor starting.

14 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
PRINT DRUM PERIPHERAL OPERATIONS

[Inking Operation (No Ink Detection)]

Position A sensor ON
OFF

Ink sensor ON
OFF

500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms


(2) OFF for A s in succession (Error: 514)

Main motor ON
(1)
OFF

Inking motor ON
OFF

(1) Inking is performed with the main motor ON.


(2) The ink sensor is monitored at 500 ms intervals, and if it is detected as OFF, the inking motor is
activated until the ink sensor goes ON. A time-out occurs at A s here, and the ink cartridge is
determined as empty. Error message [C01-512] is displayed.
Normally: (A = Value set in Test mode No. 583 (initially 20 s))
After ink replacement: (A = Value set in Test mode No. 584 (initially 40 s))

[Inking Operation (Overflow Detection)]

Position A sensor ON
OFF
Overflow sensor ON (1)
OFF
10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms

(2) ON for B times in succession


(Error: 515)
Main motor ON
OFF
Inking motor ON
OFF

(1) The overflow sensor is monitored at 10 ms intervals, and if it is detected as ON, the inking motor is
stopped for period (2) irrespective of the ink sensor status.
(2) If the overflow sensor is detected as ON B times in succession, an overflow is determined to have
occurred, and error message [T04-513] is displayed.
(B = Value set in Test mode No. 585 (initially 50 times))

14 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
PRINT DRUM PERIPHERAL OPERATIONS

[Print Drum Solenoid Lock Release]

(2)

Position A sensor ON
OFF

Print drum set sensor ON


(1)
OFF
(1) 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms
100 ms 100 ms 100 ms

Print drum release ON


switch OFF

Print drum lock ON (3) (4)


solenoid OFF Max 30 s

Print drum release ON (3)


switch LED OFF

(1) The print drum set sensor and print drum release switch are monitored at 100 ms intervals.
(2) If the print drum release switch is detected as having been depressed twice in succession, the
position A sensor is checked, and the print drum rotates to position A if the position A sensor is OFF.
(The print drum release switch LED blinks here.)
(3) The print drum lock solenoid and print drum release switch LED are switched ON until the print drum
set sensor goes OFF (until the print drum is removed) to allow the print drum to be removed at
position A.
(4) If the print drum is left at the removal position without being removed, a time-out occurs at 30 s, and
the print drum lock solenoid and print drum release switch LED are switched OFF.

14 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
PRINT ADJUSTMENT OPERATIONS

5. Print Adjustment Operations


[Print Speed Change]

220° 220° 220° 220° 220°

Position A ON
sensor OFF
Print speed UP
adjustment key OFF
DOWN (1) (2)

speed 3 speed 4 speed 3 speed 2 speed 3

(1) If the print speed adjustment key is pressed, the speed does not change immediately, but rather at
the next time the print drum reaches the 220° position.
(2) If the print speed adjustment key is pressed twice, the speed only changes by one level per
revolution, and so two revolutions are required to reach the specified speed.

[Print Intensity Change]

150° 150° 150° 150° 150°

Position A ON
sensor OFF
Print intensity UP
adjustment (1) (2)
OFF
key
DOWN

Pressure Increase
control motor OFF
Decrease

(1) If the print intensity adjustment key is pressed, the print intensity does not change immediately, but
rather at the next time the print drum reaches the 150° position.
(2) Likewise, when the print intensity adjustment key is pressed twice, the intensity changes as
specified the next time the print drum reaches the 150° position.

14 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
PRINT ADJUSTMENT OPERATIONS

[Vertical Print Positioning Operation]

Print position ON
adjustment key OFF

Within 1 s Within 1 s (Operation ignored) 1s

Print positioning ON
pulse motor OFF

0.5 mm 0.5 mm 0.5 mm 0.5 mm 0.5 mm

(1) If the print position adjustment key is pressed once (within 1 s), the position is immediately changed
0.5 mm.
(2) If the print position adjustment key is pressed twice (within 1 s), the second press is ignored if
pressed while the position is being moved for the first press.
(3) If the print position adjustment key is pressed for more than 1 s, the position is moved 5 mm for the
first 1 s pressed, and then continuously in 5 mm increments for as long as the key is pressed.

14 – 17
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
OVERALL TIMING FOR NORMAL MASTER CREATION

Master Removal Operations


1. Overall Timing for Normal Master Creation
Start End

Image scanning

Master making

Master loading

Master setting

Thermal print head


Compress Release Compress Release

Master cutting

Removed master vertical


transport Only position A adjustment if no master on print
drum
Master compressing

Paper feed tray elevator

Clamp
Release Position A Home
adjustment position reset
Print drum
Master check
Only when master on print drum is
unconfirmed
Print pressure change

Proof-read print

Pressure release

14 – 18
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL MASTER REMOVAL OPERATIONS

2. Individual Master Removal Operations


[Removed Master Vertical Transport Operation]

0° a° b° 180° 320° 0°
Print drum angle

Position A ON
sensor OFF ON
Master removal ON (Error: 304)
(4) OFF-OFF (Error: 303) A
sensor OFF
Master ON
compression (1)
sensor OFF

(2)
100 ms 100 ms 100 ms
Master removal ON
motor overload
current OFF
ON
Main motor
OFF c rpm 10 rpm
Master removal ON
(3) (5)
motor OFF d ms

When ON: Position A sensor: Blocked, Master removal sensor: Open, Master compression sensor: Open

The removed master vertical transport operation starts after the print drum clamp plate releasing
operation ends.
(1) The master compression sensor is checked on starting, and the master compression plate is
initialized if it is OFF.
(2) The master removal motor overload current is monitored continually at 100 ms intervals during the
Removed master vertical transport operation, and error message [T12-300] is displayed if an
overload current is detected three times in succession.
(3) The main motor and master removal motor are operated to vertically transport the removed master
while rotating the print drum.
The print drum speed here corresponds to the value set in Test mode No. 387 (initially 15 rpm).
(4) The progress of the removed master is checked twice by the master removal sensor at print drum
angles a° and b°, and is judged to be normal if the sensor is ON at both points. If it is OFF at one
point, error message [A04-303] is displayed.
(a = value set in Test mode No. 380 (initially 70°))
(b = value set in Test mode No. 381 (initially 90°))
(5) The print drum stops at position A, and the master removal motor stops after d ms. The master
removal sensor is checked here, and error message [A04-304] is displayed if it is ON.
(d = value set in Test mode No. 382 (initially 0 s))

14 – 19
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL MASTER REMOVAL OPERATIONS

[Disposed Master Compressing Operation]

Start End

Master ON
removal
sensor OFF
Master ON
compression (1)
sensor OFF
Disposal box ON
full sensor
OFF
Master ON
removal
motor OFF
Master Compress
compression Max 7 s (Error: 305)
motor OFF
Max 11 s (Error: 307) 100 ms
Release
Brake Brake
Max 400 ms
f sec e ms 100 ms
(Error: 306)
Max 3 s
(Error: 309)

When ON: Master removal sensor: Open, Master compression sensor: Open, Disposal box full sensor:
Open
The disposed master compressing operation starts after the removed master vertical transport operation
ends.
(1) The master compression sensor is checked on starting, and the master compression plate is
initialized if it is OFF.
(2) The master compression motor operates to start the master compression.
(3) The master compression sensor goes OFF. A time-out occurs here at 400 ms, and error message
[T12-306] is displayed.
(4) The disposal box full sensor goes ON midway.
(5) The master compression motor stops once the master compression sensor goes back ON again.
A time-out occurs at 11 s after the start of master compression here, and error message [T12-307] is
displayed.
Similarly, if (4) is not detected, the disposal box is judged to be full, and error message [C03-313] is
displayed.
(6) The master compression motor reverses f s after the motor stops.
(f = value set in Test mode No. 384 (initially 1 s))
The master compression sensor goes OFF while the master compression motor operates in
reverse.
A time-out occurs here at 3 s after reversing, and error message [T12-309] is displayed.
(7) The master compression motor stops once the master compression sensor goes back ON.
A time-out occurs here at 7 s after reversing, and error message [Error 305] is displayed.

14 – 20
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
OVERALL TIMING FOR NORMAL MASTER CREATION

Master Making Operation


1. Overall Timing for Normal Master Creation
Start End

Image scanning

Master making

Master loading

Master setting

Thermal print head


Compress Release Compress Release

Master cutting

Removed master vertical


transport

Master compressing

Paper feed tray elevator

Home
Position A
Clamp position
Release adjustment reset
Print drum

Master check

Print pressure change

Proof-read print

Pressure release

14 – 21
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

2. Individual Master Making Operation


[Thermal Print Head Compression Operation]

Start End

TPH pressure ON
sensor (2)
OFF

(1)
Release Max 250 ms
100 ms
Thermal (Error: 207)
OFF
pressure motor
Compress Brake
Max 1 s (Error: 210)

When ON: TPH pressure sensor: Blocked

(1) The thermal pressure motor operates in the direction of compression.


(2) The TPH pressure sensor goes OFF, and the thermal pressure motor stops when the sensor goes
back ON again.
A time-out occurs at 250 ms when the TPH pressure sensor goes OFF, and error message [T19-
207] is displayed. Likewise, a time-out occurs at 1 s when the TPH pressure sensor goes back on
again, and error message [Error 208] is displayed.

[Thermal Print Head Release Operation]

TPH pressure ON (2)


sensor OFF

(1)
Brake
Release
Thermal
OFF Max 250 ms
pressure motor 100 ms
Compress (Error: 207)

Max 1 s (Error: 210)

(1) The thermal pressure motor operates in the release direction.


(2) The TPH pressure sensor goes OFF, and the thermal pressure motor stops when the sensor goes
back ON again.
A time-out occurs at 250 ms when the TPH pressure sensor goes OFF, and error message [T19-
207] is displayed. Likewise, a time-out occurs at 1 s when the TPH pressure sensor goes back on
again, and error message [T19-208] is displayed.

14 – 22
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

[Master Positioning Operation]

Start End

Master ON
positioning
sensor OFF
Master detection ON
sensor (1)
OFF
Master end ON 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms (2)
sensor OFF
ON
Read/Write OFF
signal Max B mm
(Error: 202)
100 ms
Feed
Write pulse
motor OFF (3) (4) B mm
(5)
Return Max A mm (Error: 201)
Feed
Load pulse
motor OFF
Return
50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms
HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD

When ON: Master positioning sensor: Open, Master detection sensor: Open, Master end sensor: Blocked

The master positioning operation starts after master cutting is complete when setting the master loading
unit and master creation.
(1) The master detection sensor detects whether a master is present on starting. If the master detection
sensor is OFF, error message [D05-210] is displayed.
(2) The master end sensor is checked at 10 ms intervals, and if an end mark is detected twice in
succession, error message [C02-200] is displayed.
(3) The write pulse motor and load pulse motor operate in the feed direction until the master positioning
sensor goes ON. A time-out occurs here when it has fed 75 mm when setting the master loading
unit and 25 mm when inching after cutting, and error message [A01-201] is displayed.
(4) The write pulse motor and load pulse motor operate in the return direction until the master
positioning sensor goes OFF. A time-out occurs here when it has fed B mm, and error message
[A01-202] is displayed. (B = 3 mm + value set in Test mode No. 280)
(5) The master is moved a further B mm in the return direction after the master positioning sensor goes
OFF, and then motor then stops, ending the master positioning operation.

14 – 23
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

[Master Cutting Operation]

Start Normal end Error end


(1)
Master ON (4)
positioning (3)
sensor OFF
Print drum Print drum
rotates 15°. rotates 15°.
Master end ON
sensor OFF
Cutter home ON
position switch OFF
(2)
Cutter motor ON
OFF Max 200 ms Max 200 ms
(Error: 203) (Error: 203)
Max 400 ms Max 400 ms
(Error: 204) (Error: 204)

When ON: Master positioning sensor: Open, Master end sensor: Blocked

When the master making operation starts, the cutter home position switch is checked at the start of the
master cutting operation. Error message [A17-209] is displayed if it is OFF.
(1) The Master cutting operation starts after the print drum stops at angle A during master loading. (A =
220° + value set in Test mode No. 284)
(2) The cutter motor operates and stops after the cutter home position switch goes OFF and then back
ON again.
A time-out occurs at 200 ms before the switch goes OFF, and error message [T13-203] is displayed.
Likewise, a time-out occurs at 400 ms before the switch goes back ON again, and error message
[T13-204] is displayed.
(3) The print drum rotates, and the master positioning sensor is checked when the print drum reaches
the 15° position.
If the master positioning sensor is OFF, the process is normal, and master cutting ends.
If the master positioning sensor is ON, master cutting is repeated.
(4) The print drum rotates, and the master positioning sensor is rechecked when the print drum reaches
the 15° position.
If the master positioning sensor is OFF, error message [A03-206] is displayed.
If the master positioning sensor is ON, error message [T13-205] is displayed.

14 – 24
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

[Master Making Operation]

Start End

Master ON
positioning
sensor OFF
Master ON
detection (1)
sensor OFF
Master end 10 10 10 (2)
ON ms ms ms
sensor
OFF

C mm F[d] mm

(7)
Read/Write ON
signal
OFF
Write pulse Feed
motor (3)
OFF

50 300 50 50
ms ms ms ms

Feed
Load pulse OFF (5)
motor
Return

D mm
E[c] mm
Max A mm
(Error: 201)

(4) Master creation (6) Loading possible


possible

When ON: Master positioning sensor: Open, Master detection sensor: Open, Master end sensor: Blocked

The master loading and master making operation start once the thermal print head compressing is
complete.
(1) The master detection sensor checks for the presence of a master on starting.
(2) The master end sensor is checked at 10 ms intervals during the master transport operation, and if
the end mark is detected twice in succession, error message [C02-200] is displayed.
(3) The write pulse motor and load pulse motor operate in the feed direction until the master positioning
sensor goes ON. A time-out occurs here when the master is fed A mm, and error message [A01-
201] is displayed. (A = 3 mm + value set in Test mode No. 280)
(4) The write pulse motor operates once the clamp release operation ends for removing the master, and
master creation starts after it has been transported to the position for the start of printing. (C = 6.5
mm + value set in Test mode No. 281)
(5) The load pulse motor operates to transport the leading edge of the master to the master loading
position. (D = 95 mm)

14 – 25
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS
INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

(6) Once the removed master vertical transport ends and the print drum position A adjustment is
complete, the load pulse motor operates to transport the leading edge of the master to the clamp
position. (E = 136.1 mm + value set in Test mode No. 283)
(7) Master creation ends once master creation is complete for the effective printing area.

14 – 26
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15: PANEL MESSAGES

Contents

1. Explanation of Panel Messages .................................................................................. 15-2


2. List of Panel Messages ................................................................................................ 15-3
3. Details of Panel Messages .......................................................................................... 15-4
4. Backed-up Errors ....................................................................................................... 15-17

15 – 1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
EXPLANATION OF PANEL MESSAGES

1. Explanation of Panel Messages


Overview of messages
1) Error code displays
• If an error occurs, an error message is displayed together with a graphic and an error code to
indicate the problem to the user.
• Error code displays consist of an error type according to the type of error and an error point
number corresponding to the error situation.
Example: T99-123 T99: Error type
123: Error point
2) Error type
The order of error priority is as shown below.

Error type Error details

T Serviceman call error

A Jam error

B Option error

C Consumable error

D Set error

E Warning (call serviceman)

3) Error point
The error point classifications are as shown below.

Error point Error details

0XX System (hardware, software, communication), panel

1XX Scanning section (scanner, ADF), image processing

2XX Master making section

3XX Master removal section

4XX Paper feed/ejection section

5XX Print drum

6XX Printing adjustment section (vertical position, density)

7XX Optional equipments (Job separator, Key /Card Counter)

15 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
LIST OF PANEL MESSAGES

2. List of Panel Messages

Error type Details Error type Details

T01 Main motor lock B01 Key/Card counter: No card

T02 Elevator motor lock

T03 Clamp motor lock Error type Details

T04 Overflow C01 Replace ink cartridge

T05 Vertical positioning pulse motor lock C02 Replace master roll

T08 Computer interface error C03 Master disposal-box-full

T11 Pressure control motor lock C04 No paper

T12 Master removal motor lock


Error type Details
T13 Cutter motor lock
D01 Print drum not set
T14 Flat bed error
D02 Incorrect print drum
T15 ADF error
D03 Ink cartridge not set
T17 Solenoid counter not connected
D04 Incorrect ink cartridge
T19 Thermal pressure motor lock
D05 Master not mounted
T20 Master creation motor lock
D07 Master disposal box not set
T23 Scanner lock not released
D09 Master loading unit not set
T24 Inking motor lock
D10 Scanner table not set
T25 No battery
D11 Front cover not set
T98 Hardware error

Error type Details


Error type Details
E01 Replace battery
A01 Master feed error
E02 Maintenance call
A02 Master loading error

A03 Cutting error

A04 Master removal error

Master present in master


A05
removal section

A06 Check paper feed tray

A07 Paper feed error

A08 Paper jam on Print Drum

A09 Paper ejection error

A10 ADF original feed error

A16 Awaiting master removal

A17 Cutter error

15 – 3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

3. Details of Panel Messages


Technician errors

Error type T01 [Main motor lock]

T01-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T01-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Power failure/Emergency stop action

Error point Error detection conditions

Main FG does not go ON/OFF for more than 8 pulses while the main motor is operating
520
even after 100 ms has elapsed.

Position A sensor does not go ON/OFF while the main motor is operating even after 10s
521
has elapsed.

523 Main motor over current.

Clamp sensors A or B were ON while the print drum operates. (Except during master
524
removal)

536 osition A sensor went OFF while stopped at position A.

Error type T02 [Elevator motor lock]

T02-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T02-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Power failure/Emergency stop action

Error point Error detection conditions

400 Both upper and lower limit sensors were ON.

401 Overload current detected in the elevator motor.

Lower limit sensor does not go OFF within 2 s after the elevator motor operates in the upper
404
direction from the lower limit position.

Upper limit sensor does not go ON within 12 s after the elevator motor operates in the upper
405
direction.

Upper limit sensor does not go OFF within 2 s after the elevator motor operates in the lower
406
direction from upper limit position.

Lower limit sensor does not go ON within 12 s after the elevator motor operates in the lower
407
direction.

408 Upper limit sensor is OFF continuously for at least 2 s during the elevator servo operation.

15 – 4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T03 [Clamp motor lock]

T03-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T03-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Power failure/Emergency stop action

Error point Error detection conditions

Clamp sensors A and B do not change 3 s after the clamp motor activates during clamp
501
initialization.

Clamp sensor A or B was ON 13 s after the clamp motor activated during clamp
502
initialization.

Clamp sensor B does not go ON within 3 s after the clamp motor activates during the clamp
503
plate master release operation.

Clamp sensor A does not go ON and clamp sensor B does not go OFF within 12 s after the
504
clamp motor activates during the clamp plate master release operation.

Clamp sensor B does not go ON within 3 s after the clamp motor activates during the clamp
505
plate master clamp operation.

Clamp sensor A does not go OFF within 5 s after the clamp motor activates during the
506
clamp plate master clamp operation.

Error type T-04 [Overflow]

T04-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T04-***.

Reset method Jam reset and overflow sensor OFF

Error point Error detection conditions

Overflow sensor was ON for a set number of times in succession during the 10-ms-interval
513
overflow check.

Error type [T05 [Vertical positioning pulse motor lock]

T05-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T05-***.

Jam reset -> Recovery operation (home position reset)


Reset method
Or: switch on power again.

Error point Error detection conditions

Vertical centering sensor does not switch OFF -> ON even when vertical positioning pulse
603
motor is moved 18 mm in the ON direction.

Vertical centering sensor does not switch ON -> OFF even when vertical positioning pulse
604
motor is moved 18 mm in the OFF direction.

612 1-step vertical positioning key was pressed with undefined position data.

15 – 5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T08 [CI error]

T08-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Switch on power again.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T08-***.

Reset method Switch on power again.

Error point Error conditions

002 CI communication error

Error type T11 [Pressure control motor lock]

T11-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T11-***.

Jam reset -> Recovery operation (home position reset)


Reset method
Or: switch on power again.

Error point Error conditions

Print pressure control sensor does not go OFF -> ON even when the pressure control motor
600 is moved 3200 pulses in the direction of compression when setting the pressure control
home position.

Print pressure control sensor does not go ON -> OFF even when the pressure control motor
601 is moved 3200 pulses in the release direction when setting the pressure control home
position.

Print pressure control sensor does not go OFF -> ON even when the pressure control motor
602 is moved 10 pulses to check the home position when setting the pressure control home
position.

Error type T12 [Master removal motor lock]

T12-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T12-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

300 Master removal motor (vertical transport motor) overload current detection is ON.

Master compression sensor does not go ON within 7 s after the master compression motor
305
operates in the return direction.

Master compression sensor does not go OFF within 400 ms after the master compression
306
motor operates in the direction of compression.

Master compression sensor does not go ON within 11 s after the master compression motor
307
operates in the direction of compression.

Master compression sensor does not go OFF within 3 s after the master compression
309
motor operates in the return direction.

15 – 6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T13 [Cutter motor lock]

T13-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T13-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

Cutter home position switch does not go OFF within 200 ms after the cutter motor is
203
activated.

Cutter home position switch does not go OFF -> ON within 400 ms after the cutter motor is
204
activated.

Master positioning sensor is ON when the print drum rotates through the preset angle after
205 cutting, and master positioning sensor is still ON when the print drum rotates through the
preset angle after repeat cutting.

Error type T14 [Flat bed fault]

T14-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T14-***.

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

Flat bed home position sensor does not go ON at the point when it should go OFF -> ON.
100 (when moved the predetermined amount for FB original scanning or when moving to the
ADF scanning position.)

Flat bed home position sensor does not go OFF at the point when it should go ON -> OFF.
101 (when moved the predetermined amount for FB original scanning or when moving to the
ADF scanning position.)

110 Communication error with shading IC.

Error type T15 [ADF fault]

T15-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T15-***.

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

114 ADF original detection signal went OFF during ADF operation.

115 Operation clock of ADF transport motor is not correct.

15 – 7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T17 [Solenoid counter not connected]

T17-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T17-***.

Reset method Solenoid counter connection signal ON

Error point Error conditions

020 Solenoid counter is not connected.

Error type T19 [Thermal pressure motor lock]

T19-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T19-***.

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

TPH pressure sensor does not go OFF within 250 ms after the thermal pressure motor
207
activates.

208 TPH pressure sensor does not go OFF within 1 s after the thermal pressure motor activates.

Error type T20 [Master creation motor lock]

T20-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T20-***.

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

416 An overload current was detected in the feed motor.

Error type T23 [Scanner lock not released]

T23-***
Panel display Scanner is locked.
Release lock.

Reset method Clear the scanner lock mode. (Test mode No. 155)

Error point Error conditions

111 In scanner lock mode.

15 – 8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T24 [Inking motor lock]

T24-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T24-***.

Reset method Jam reset or switch on power again.

Error point Error conditions

539 Inking motor current overload.

Error type T25 [No battery]

T25-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T25-***.

Replace battery.
Reset method
* The machine does not operate when this error occurs.

Error point Error conditions

026 Residual battery voltage below 1.5 V when power is ON.

Error type T98 [Hardware error]

T98-***
A problem has occurred.
Panel display
Switch on power again.
If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T98-***.

Reset method Switch on power again.

Error point Error conditions

005 Hardware error.

Memory check sum error.


Memory contents have changed since power was last switched off.
006 * If this error occurs, a memory fault is identified the next time the power is switched on,
and the memory (test mode, user mode, memory mode, and error backup details) is
cleared.

AMF PCB was fitted to machine not compatible with AMF PCB or AMF PCB was not fitted
028
to machine compatible with AMF PCB.

543 Print drum communication error.

15 – 9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Jam errors

Error type A01 [Master feed error]

A01-***
Panel display Master jammed.
Rewind master, and the reset.

Master loading unit switch: OFF -> ON, then master positioning sensor OFF.
Reset method
(Or switch on power again.)

Error point Error conditions

Master positioning sensor does not go ON even when the master is fed preset amount after
201
write pulse motor is activated.

Master positioning sensor does not go OFF even when the master is rewound during
202
master positioning operation.

211 Master positioning sensor was ON during standby.

214 Master positioning sensor was ON at start of master creation.

215 Faulty gate array control for write pulse motor or load pulse motor.

Error type A02 [Master loading error]

A02-***
Panel display Master jammed.
Rewind master, and the reset.

Master loading unit switch: OFF -> ON, then master positioning sensor OFF.
Reset method
-> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

Master loading sensor was OFF when checking master at specified angle in master loading
509
operation.

Error type A03 [Cutting error]

A03-***
Panel display Master is not correctly wound onto print drum.
Remove master from print drum.

Reset method Print drum set sensor: OFF -> ON -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

206 Cutting was performed after repeating cutting operation.

15 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type A04 [Master removal error]

A04-***
Panel display Cannot eject master.
Pull out print drum and remove master.

Reset method Print drum set sensor: OFF -> ON -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

303 OFF/OFF in removal jam sensor check at 70°/90°.

304 Removal jam sensor was ON at end of removed master feed operation.

Emergency stop or power failure occurred while releasing clamp in master removal
314
operation.

Error type A05 [Master present in master removal section]

A05-***
Panel display Master jammed in master removal section.
Open master removal unit and remove master.

Master removal unit set sensor: OFF -> ON, and Removal jam sensor: OFF
Reset method
(Or switch on power again.)

Error point Error conditions

312 Removal jam sensor was ON on starting master making operation.

Error type A06 [Check paper feed tray]

A06-***
Panel display
Check paper feed tray.

Paper feed tray lower safety switch goes ON.


Reset method
(Or switch on power again.)

Error point Error conditions

403 Paper feed tray lower safety switch was OFF.

Error type A07 [Paper feed error]

A07-***
Panel display Paper jammed.
Check paper feed side, and press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.

Reset method Set paper sensor to OFF, and reset jam.

Error point Error conditions

Paper receiving sensor was OFF when paper arrived and paper sensor was ON at 180°
409
just before stopping.

Paper sensor was OFF three times in succession when detecting first stage paper feed
412
jam. (Non-pickup error)

413 Paper sensor was ON when paper left paper sensor. (Scale error)

418 Paper sensor was ON at start of operation.

15 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type A08 [Ejected paper lifting up]

A08-***
Panel display Paper jammed.
Pull out print drum and remove jammed paper.

Print drum set sensor: OFF -> ON.


Reset method
(Or switch on power again.)

Error point Error conditions

Paper receiving sensor was OFF when paper arrived and paper sensor was OFF at 180°
410
just before stopping.

Error type A09 [Paper ejection error]

A09-***
Panel display Paper jammed.
Check paper ejection side, and press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.

Reset method Set paper receiving sensor to OFF, and reset jam.

Error point Error conditions

411 Paper receiving sensor was ON when paper left paper receiving sensor.

417 Paper receiving sensor was ON at start of operation.

Error type A10 [ADF original feed error]

A10-***
Paper jammed.
Panel display
Remove paper while pressing the reset button.
Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.

Reset method Set ADF original detection sensor to OFF, and reset jam.

Error point Error conditions

ADF original feed error (1): Original was missing when fed in. Original detection sensor
104 was already ON when power was switched on or when jam was reset. Did not leave
original registration sensor even when fed 543 mm after starting scanning.

ADF original feed error (2): Did not leave original read sensor even when fed 114 mm after
105
original registration sensor went OFF.

ADF original feed error (3): Did not leave paper receiving sensor even when fed 117 mm
106
after original read sensor went OFF.

ADF original feed error (4): Did not reach original registration sensor even when fed 182
107
mm after start of feeding in.

ADF original feed error (5): Did not reach original read sensor even when fed 138 mm after
108
start of scanning.

ADF original feed error (6): Did not reach paper receiving sensor even when fed 117 mm
109
after original read sensor went ON.

15 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type A16 [Awaiting master removal]

A16-***
Panel type
Pull out print drum and remove master mounted on print drum.

Reset method Print drum set sensor: OFF -> ON -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

525 Master not cut due to cutter motor locking at emergency stop.

Error type A17 [Cutter fault]

A17-***
Panel display Problem occurred.
Remove master and close master creation unit.

Master loading set unit: OFF -> ON, and Master detection sensor: OFF
Reset method
-> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

209 Cutter home position switch was OFF during master setting at start of master creation.

Option errors

Error type B01 [Card counter: No card]

B01-***
Panel display
Insert the card for the card counter.

Reset method Insert card.

Error point Error conditions

728 No card counter card.

Consumable errors

Error type C01 [Replace ink cartridge]

C01-***
Panel display Ink is exhausted.
Replace ink cartridge.

Reset method Ink cartridge set switch: OFF -> ON.

Error point Error conditions

512 Ink sensor does not go ON even when inking is run for preset period.

15 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type C02 [Replace master roll]

C02-***
Panel display No more masters.
Replace master roll.

Reset method Master loading sensor: OFF -> ON, and Master detection sensor: OFF -> ON.

Error point Error conditions

200 Master end detected twice in succession at 10 ms interval check during master transport.

Error type C03 [Master disposal-box-full]

C03-***
Panel display
Empty master disposal box.

Reset method Disposal box full sensor to ON after switching OFF for 5 s.

Error point Error conditions

308 Master disposal box detected as full by disposal box full sensor.

313 Master disposal box detected as full by software master count.

Error type C04 [No paper]

C04-***
Panel display
Set paper.

Reset method Paper detection sensor to ON.

Error point Error conditions

402 Paper detection sensor was OFF.

Setting check errors

Error type D01 [Print drum not set]

D01-***
Panel display
Set print drum.

Reset method Print drum safety switch: ON, and Print drum set sensor: ON.

Error point Error conditions

526 Print drum safety switch was ON and print drum set sensor was OFF on setting print drum.

527 Print drum safety switch was OFF.

Print drum set sensor does not go ON within 2 s after print drum safety switch goes OFF ->
546
ON on setting print drum.

15 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type D02 [Incorrect print drum]

D02-***
Panel display Incorrect print drum.
Set correct print drum.

Reset method Replace with correct print drum.

Error point Error conditions

532 Print drum is incorrect.

Error type D03 [Ink cartridge not set]

D03-***
Panel display
Set ink cartridge.

Reset method Ink cartridge set switch: ON

Error point Error conditions

533 Ink cartridge set switch was OFF.

Error type D04 [Incorrect ink cartridge]

D04-***
Panel display Incorrect ink cartridge.
Set correct ink cartridge.

Reset method Replace with correct ink cartridge.

Error point Error conditions

534 Ink cartridge was incorrect.

Error type D05 [Master not mounted]

D05-***
Panel display Master is not mounted correctly.
Insert leading edge of master in inlet and close master creation unit.

Reset method Master detection sensor: ON.

Error point Error conditions

210 Master detection sensor was OFF.

Error type D07 [Master disposal box not set]

D07-***
Panel display
Set master disposal box.

Reset method Master removal section safety switch: ON.

Error point Error conditions

310 Master disposal box set switch was OFF.

15 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type D09 [Master loading unit not set]

D09-***
Panel display
Close master loading unit.

Reset method Master loading unit switch: ON.

Error point Error conditions

212 Master loading unit switch was OFF.

Error type D10 [Scanner table not set]

D10-***
Panel display
Set scanner table.

Reset method Scanner table set switch: ON.

Error point Error conditions

213 Scanner table set switch was OFF.

Error type D11 [Front cover not set]

D11-***
Panel display
Close front cover.

Reset method Front cover set switch: ON.

Error point Error conditions

535 Front cover set switch was OFF.

Warnings

Error type E01 [Replace battery]

E01-***
Battery must be replaced.
Panel display
Contact technician.
(Press lower right "Jam Reset" to continue operation.)

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

Battery voltage is less than 2.1 V when power is switched ON, reset, or operation ended.
010
(Battery replacement)

15 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES
BACKED-UP ERRORS

Error type E02 [Call technician]

E02-***
Time for periodic maintenance.
Panel display
Contact technician.
(Press lower right "Jam Reset" to continue operation.)

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

Number of masters completed reached value set in Test mode when power was switched
011
ON, reset, or operation ended.

Number of prints completed reached value set in Test mode when power was switched ON,
012
reset, or operation ended.

Maintenance counter inside print drum reached value set in Test mode when power was
022
switched ON, reset, or operation ended.

4. Backed-up Errors
The following errors are backed up and are not cleared even when the power is switched off.

Error type Error details

T01 Main motor lock

T03 Clamp motor lock

T13 Cutter motor lock

T18 Master mounting motor lock

A02 Master mounting error

A03 Cutting error

A04 Master removal error

A16 Awaiting master removal

A17 Cutter fault

C01 Replace ink cartridge

C02 Replace master roll

C03 Master disposal-box-full

15 – 17
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16: TEST MODE

Contents

1. Procedures ................................................................................................................... 16-2


1) Start-up Procedure ................................................................................................. 16-2
2) Operating Procedure ............................................................................................. 16-2
3) Ending Procedure .................................................................................................. 16-3
2. Checking Sensors and Switches ................................................................................. 16-4
3. Checking Motors and Solenoids .................................................................................. 16-6
4. Checking Unit Operations ............................................................................................ 16-7
5. Data Check ................................................................................................................. 16-10
6. Data Setting ................................................................................................................. 16-11
Print Drum Code Settings .......................................................................................... 16-18

16 – 1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
PROCEDURES

Test Mode
1. Procedures
1) Start-up Procedure
Switch on the power while pressing the “Master/Print” and “Text/Photo” keys simultaneously.
2) Operating Procedure
Test mode numbers can be entered (selected) either via “Key entry” or “Menu selection.”
a) Key entry procedure
(1) Enter the number of the test mode to be run using the numeric keys while in standby mode.
If a mistake is made when entering, entry can be repeated by pressing the “C” key.
(2) Press the “Start” key to start the Test mode operation.
(3) Press the “Stop” or “Start” key to end the Test mode operation and return to standby mode.
* When setting data, pressing the “Start” key confirms the data changes and returns you to
standby mode. Pressing the “Stop” key cancels the settings before returning to standby
mode.
b) Menu selection method
(1) While in standby mode, select the unit containing the test item to be run from the Test mode
menu.
• Highlight the unit name using the up/down keys or function keys, and then press the
“Enter” key.
• The Test mode sub-menu appears.
(2) Select the test item to be run from the Test mode sub-menu.
• Highlight the test item using the cursor keys or function keys, and then press the “Enter”
key.
(3) Press the “Start” key to start the Test mode operation.
(4) Press the “Stop” or “Start” key to end the Test mode operation and return to standby mode.

Test mode menu display Test mode sub-menu display

“Enter”
key ON

“Close”
key ON

16 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
PROCEDURES

Display during Test mode operation

Display during check operation Display during data setting

Technician contact entry screen display (Test mode No. 091)


Entering/editing telephone number
• Enter digits using the numeric keys, hyphens
using the “*” key, and spaces using the “C” key.
• Edit by moving the cursor to the character to be
corrected using the left and right cursor keys,
and then overwrite.

“Enter” key,
“Change name”
“Cancel” key
key ON
ON

Entering/editing retailer name


• Select the character to be entered using the
cursor keys, and press the “Input” key to input
the character at the cursor position in the label.
• To edit, press “Back” to delete characters one
by one from the current cursor position, and
then enter the new characters. (Correction
midway is not possible.)
• Press “Cancel” to cancel all input and return to
the previous screen.
• When input is complete, press “Enter” to return
to the previous screen.

3) Ending Procedure
To end Test mode, press the “All Reset” key for 1 second in Test mode standby or in Test mode
operation standby.

16 – 3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
CHECKING SENSORS AND SWITCHES

2. Checking Sensors and Switches


Indicates sensor and switch status using audible beeps.
• Detected: 0.1 second interval sound (short beeps)
• Not detected: 0.5 second interval sound (long beeps)

No. Test item Detection status


100 Image scanner ADF shading sensor Blocked (shading plate present)
101 Flat bed original detection sensor Open (original present)
110 ADF original registration sensor Blocked
111 ADF original IN sensor Blocked (reflection blocked)
112 Original OUT sensor Blocked
113 ADF original detection sensor Open (original present)
117 Cover open sensor Blocked
119 ADF unit detection signal Signal present (ADF connected)
200 Master positioning sensor Open (master present)
201 Master end sensor Blocked (master end label detected)
202 Master detection sensor Open (master present)
203 Cutter home position switch Switch OFF
204 TPH pressure sensor Blocked (TPH pressure plate closed)
205 Master loading unit sensor Blocked (master loading unit closed)
206 Flat bed set switch Switch ON
300 Master removal sensor Blocked (master present)
301 Master compression sensor Blocked (master compression plate present)
302 Disposal-box-full sensor Blocked
303 Disposal box safety switch Switch ON
400 Paper detection sensor Open (paper present)
401 Paper size detection sensor Open (paper present)
402 Upper limit sensor Blocked (shading plate present)
404 Lower limit sensor Blocked (shading plate present)
405 Paper sensor Open (paper present)
406 Paper receiving sensor Blocked (paper present)
408 Paper feed tray lower safety switch Switch ON
409 Elevator down switch Switch ON
412 Encoder sensor (paper ejec. motor) Blocked (shading plate present)

16 – 4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
CHECKING SENSORS AND SWITCHES

No. Test item Detection status


500 Position A sensor Blocked (shading plate present)
502 Main motor encoder sensor Blocked (shading plate present)
503 Clamp sensor A Blocked (shading plate present)
504 Clamp sensor B Blocked (shading plate present)
506 Master sensor Open (master present)
509 Ink sensor In contact with ink
510 Overflow sensor In contact with ink
511 Ink cartridge set switch 1 Switch ON
512 Ink cartridge set switch 2 Switch ON
513 Ink cartridge set switch 3 Switch ON
514 Ink cartridge set switch 4 Switch ON
515 Ink cartridge set switch 5 Switch ON
516 Print drum free rotation switch Switch ON
517 Front cover set switch Switch ON
518 Print drum release switch Switch ON
519 Print drum set sensor Blocked (shading plate present)
520 Print drum safety switch Switch ON
600 Print pressure control sensor Blocked (shading plate present)
601 Vertical centering sensor Blocked (shading plate present)

16 – 5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
CHECKING MOTORS AND SOLENOIDS

3. Checking Motors and Solenoids


Press the “Start” key to switch ON, and either the “Start” or “Stop” key to switch OFF.

No. Test item Remarks


030 Audible beep check 1 0.1 second interval
031 Audible beep check 2 0.5 second interval
130 CCD lamp Illuminates
132 ADF read pulse motor (CW)
133 ADF read pulse motor (CCW)
230 Thermal pressure motor (CW)
231 Thermal pressure motor (CCW)
232 Write pulse motor (feed) CW
233 Write pulse motor (return) CCW
234 Load pulse motor (feed) CW
235 Load pulse motor (return) CCW
237 Cutter motor
238 TPH thermal power
330 Master removal motor CW
430 Paper ejection motor
431 Suction fan
432 Separation fan
530 Main motor (15 rpm)
531 Main motor (30 rpm)
532 Clamp motor (forward) CCW
533 Clamp motor (reverse) CW (Only in Test mode)
535 Print drum release switch-LED

16 – 6
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
CHECKING UNIT OPERATIONS

4. Checking Unit Operations


(1) Press the “Start” key to switch ON and start the unit operation. Error checks are performed basically
the same as for normal operation. Some operations stop once the sequence is complete, and
some operations continue until a key is pressed.
(2) A continuous audible tone is given if an error occurs. To cancel errors, press the “Reset” key.

No. Test mode details


050 Print test A (checker flag pattern)
Creates a master for test pattern 1.
051 Print test B (mesh pattern)
Creates a master for test pattern 2.
056 Paper passage test (continuous printing)
Passes paper through.
* "Speed" key can be used.
057 Low-speed printing
Prints at 15 rpm.
059 Auto power off signal
Switches off power.
060 Key check
Pressing a key displays a specified number on the Print quantity LED.
061 LCD check
Displays check pattern on LCD.
062 LED check
LEDs blink alternately
063 Unit initialization
Rests mechanical components to their home positions. (clamps, vertical position,
thermal print head, master compression plate)
150 Shading operation
Runs shading operation.
151 Scanner home position reset
Returns scanner to home position.
152 Scanner 1 cycle
Performs one scanner operation cycle.
* Adjusts speed according to the variation rate in Test mode No. 192.
153 Scanner ADF scanning position movement
Moves scanner to ADF scanning position.
154 Scanner lock mode
Moves scanner to lock position for transporting.
* Error occurs.
155 Undo scanner lock mode
Cancels error status set in Test mode No. 154.
156 ADF original feed 1 cycle
Performs paper passage test for ADF unit alone.
157 ADF original feed operation
Performs ADF original transport operation.
* Adjusts speed according to the variation rate in Test mode No. 192.

16 – 7
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
CHECKING UNIT OPERATIONS

No. Test mode details


250 Cutter motor 1 cycle operation
Performs cutting operation.
251 TPH compress operation
Moves TPH to compress position.
252 TPH release operation
Moves TPH to release position.
350 Master compression plate home position reset
Returns the master compression plate to the home position.
351 Master compression 1 cycle operation
Performs one master compression cycle.
352 Master compression 1 step (compress direction)
Performs one step (500 ms) of master compression in the direction of compression.
* Note that error checking is not performed here.
353 Master compression 1 step (return direction)
Performs one step (500 ms) of master compression in the return direction.
* Note that error checking is not performed here.
450 Paper width VR Adjustment (105 mm)
Sets VR value of 105 mm.
* Perform before Test mode No. 451.
451 Paper width VR Adjustment (210 mm)
Sets VR value of 210 mm.
* Perform after Test mode No. 450.
452 Paper feed tray Up/Down
Raises and lowers the paper feed tray repeatedly.
* Starts by raising, except when at the upper limit.
* Stops when the "Stop" key is pressed.
* Stops for 1 s at the upper and lower limits.
453 Elevator servo
Performs servo operation.
454 Feed motor + suction fan
Activates feed motor and suction fan simultaneously.
550 Print drum speed control
Use speed keys to rotate the print drum.
* Same operation as for normal printing.
551 Position A operation
Stops the print drum at position A.
* Position including adjustment values.
553 Clamp home position reset
Resets clamp to home position.
554 Clamp movement (3 steps)
Press the "Start" key to switch on, and then perform the following operations for each
step.
Step 1: Release master clamp.
Step 2: Open clamp.
Step 3: Close clamp.
557 Inking operation
Rotates the print drum and inks until the ink sensor goes ON.
558 Ink-free printing operation
Performs printing without inking.

16 – 8
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
CHECKING UNIT OPERATIONS

No. Test mode details


650 Vertical positioning home position reset
Resets the print drum to the vertical center position.
651 Vertical positioning 1 cycle
Performs one vertical positioning cycle.
654 Print pressure home position reset
Resets print pressure to home position.
655 Print pressure 1 cycle
Performs one print pressure change cycle.
656 Print adjustment paper passage test
Performs paper passage operation.
* Speed keys can be used. Vertical movement is possible using the vertical position
keys.
657 Print adjustment low-speed printing
Prints at 15 rpm.
* Vertical movement is possible using the vertical position keys.
750 CI firmware download
Enables the execution program stored on CI flash memory to be overwritten.
* Connection to PC required.
751 CI test print
Prints the test pattern specified at the time of CI connection.

16 – 9
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
DATA CHECK

5. Data Check
Press the “Start” key to display data.
* Data check only displays the various settings, and does not allow them to be changed.

No. Data Display details


Lists Test mode No. and setting for non-default items during
070 Data setting change confirmation
data setting.
Displays error code (D**) for set switch that caused
071 Set switch history
operation to stop. (Most recent item)
Lists error codes for error codes occurring recently in
072 Error history
normal mode. (Max 8 codes)
Displays current maintenance count.
* Master count is in units of 100 (9999 = 999900).
073 Maintenance count
Total count and print drum count are in units of 1000
(9999 = 9999000).
074 Battery voltage (A/D) Displays residual battery voltage as (A/D).
075 Batter voltage (V) Displays residual battery voltage as (V) * 1000.
270 TPH thermistor (A/D) Displays TPH thermistor AD value.
Displays TPH thermistor AD value converted to temperature
271 TPH thermistor (°C)
* 100.
371 Removed master software count Displays stored count.
470 Paper width (A/D) Displays 10-bit data after A/D conversion.
471 Paper width (mm) Displays paper width (mm) after adjustment.
570 Print drum encoder count Displays encoder value.
571 Print drum angle Displays print drum angle.
572 Ink temperature sensor (A/D) Displays ink thermistor A/D value.
573 Ink temperature sensor (°C) Displays ink thermistor A/D value converted to °C * 100.

16 – 10
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
DATA SETTING

6. Data Setting
(1) Press the “Start” key to display and operate the data currently set.
(2) Change data using the numeric keys. Switch to the ± display using the “*” key.
(3) Once settings have been changed, press the “Enter” or “Start” key to confirm the data and return to
standby.
* Settings will be changed to their default values if values outside the setting ranges are entered.

No. Name
080 Jam clear
Forcibly clears jam.
Description
Consumable errors cannot be cleared.
Setting None
081 Memory clear (user area)
Resets settings (memory, user mode, timers) other than Test mode data settings,
Description type codes, print drum codes, and ink codes to their default values.
* Always save data before resetting.
Setting None
082 Test mode data setting clear
Resets all settings set in Test modes to defaults values.
Description
* Always save data before resetting.
Setting None
083 Maintenance master count setting
Description Sets the number of masters at which the call-technician message is displayed.
Range: 0 - 9999 (*100)
Setting Units: 1 (*100)
Default: 0
084 Maintenance main unit print count setting
Sets the number of main unit prints at which the call-technician message is
Description
displayed.
Range: 0 - 9999 (*1000)
Setting Units: 1 (*1000)
Default: 0
085 Maintenance print-drum print count setting
Sets the number of print-drum prints at which the call-technician message is
Description
displayed. (Set for each print drum.)
Range: 0 - 9999 (*1000)
Setting Units: 1 (*1000)
Default: 0
087 Maintenance count clear (master creation)
Clears the master count (within software) for displaying technician call message
Description
the call-technician message.
Setting None
088 Maintenance count clear (printing)
Clears the print count (within software) for displaying technician call message the
Description
call-technician message.
Setting None
089 Maintenance count clear (print drum)
Clears the print-drum print count (within software) for displaying technician call
Description
message the call-technician message.
Setting None

16 – 11
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
DATA SETTING

No. Name
091 Technician contact setting
Description Sets technician contact address and retailer name for displaying on error screens.
* Set using special technician contact setting screen.
Setting
Space if not set.
094 Minimum print number setting enable
Description Sets the minimum print number set in user mode to Enabled/Disabled.
Range: 1 (Enabled), 0 (Disabled)
Setting
Default: 1 (Enabled)
095 Solenoid counter enable/disable setting
Description Sets solenoid counter to Enabled/Disabled.
Range: 1 (Enabled), 0 (Disabled)
Setting Default: 1 (Enabled)
* This setting is reset to default (solenoid enabled) when power is switched on.
180 FB horizontal scanning position adjustment
Description Adjusts the original horizontal scan position using the image sensor.
Range: -35 - +40 (-3.5 mm - +4.0 mm) * (+ is to left)
Setting Units: 5 (0.5 mm)
Default: 0 mm
181 FB scan start position adjustment
Description Adjusts original scanning start position using the image sensor.
Range: -60 - +60 (-6.0 mm - +6.0 mm) * (+ is downward)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0 mm
182 FB scan image elongation and shrinkage adjustment.
Adjusts the original scanning speed using the image sensor. (Image sensor travel
Description
speed)
Range: -100 - +100 (-10.0% - +10.0%) * (+ elongates)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1%)
Default: 0%
184 ADF-ABC mirror position adjustment
hanges the ABC scanning position for ADF scanning using mirror position
Description
adjustment.
Range: -20 - +20 (-2.0 mm - +2.0 mm)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1 mm) * (+ brings forward scanning start position.)
Default: 0 mm
185 ADF horizontal scanning position adjustment
Description Adjusts original horizontal scan position using the image sensor.
Range: -35 - +40 (-3.5 mm - +4.0 mm) * (+ is to left)
Setting Units: 5 (0.5 mm)
Default: 0 mm
186 ADF scan start position adjustment
Description Adjusts original scanning start position using ADF.
Range: -60 - +60 (-6.0 mm - +6.0 mm) * (+ is downward)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0 mm
187 ADF scan image elongation and shrinkage adjustment.
Description Adjusts original scanning speed using ADF. (Transport motor speed)
Range: -100 - +100 (-10.0% - +10.0%) * (+ elongates)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1%)
Default: 0%

16 – 12
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
DATA SETTING

No. Name
188 Slice level setting
Sets text mode slice level.
Description
(Finer for larger values)
Range: -16 - +16
Setting Units: 1
Default: 0
189 ABC slice level setting
Sets ABC (automatic base control) slice level.
Description
(Finer for larger values)
Range: -16 - +16
Setting Units: 1
Default: 0
192 Scanning speed (for 1 cycle)
Description Sets the change rate for setting FB and ADF scanning pulse motor speeds.
Range: 50% - 200%
Setting Units: 1%
Default: 100%
193 ADF registration loop amount
Description Adjusts slack when feeding into ADF.
Range: -30 - +30 (-3.0 mm - +3.0 mm)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0 mm

16 – 13
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
DATA SETTING

No. Name
280 Master setting adjustment
Adjusts a small amount of return movement after the master positioning sensor
Description
goes ON for inching operation during master setting or after master cutting.
Range: 0 - 50 (0 mm - 5.0 mm)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 20 (2.0 mm)
281 Master creation start position adjustment
Adjusts the master creation start position (distance from master positioning
Description
sensor ON to read/write signal ON).
Range: -30 - +50 (-3.0 mm - +5.0 mm) * (+ is downward)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0 mm
282 Master creation length adjustment
Description Adjusts the master creation area (width scanning length).
Range: -100 - +100 (-10.0 mm - +10.0 mm) * (+ increases length)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0 mm
283 Clamp range adjustment
Description Adjusts master clamp range when loading master.
Range: -100 - +100 (-10.0 mm - +10.0 mm) * (+ increases clamp range)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0 mm
284 Master overall length adjustment (cutting angle)
Description Adjusts the length of one master (cutting timing).
Range: -100 - +200 (-10.0° - +20.0°) * (+ increases master length)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1°)
Default: 0°
287 Master creation image elongation and shrinkage adjustment
Description Adjusts frequency setting for the master creation pulse motor.
Range: -100 - +100 (-10.0%- +10.0%) * (+ elongates)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1%)
Default: 0%

16 – 14
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
DATA SETTING

No. Name
380 Jam removal detection angle 1
Description Sets the first print drum angle for checking jam removal.
Range: 0 - 3600 (0° - 360°)
Setting Units: 10 (1°)
Default: 700 (70°)
381 Jam removal detection angle 2
Description Sets the second print drum angle for checking jam removal.
Range: 0 - 3600 (0° - 360°)
Setting Units: 10 (1°)
Default: 900 (90°)
382 Master removal motor stop timing
Description Sets master-removal-motor stop timing after the print drum stops at position A.
Range: 0 - 2000 (0 s - 2 s)
Setting Units: 10 (0.01 s)
Default: 0 s
384 Master compression plate return timing
Sets master-compression-plate stop timing after moving to the compression
Description
position until it starts to return.
Range: 0 s - 100 s
Setting Units: 1s
Default: 1 s
386 Master disposal box count
Description Sets count for full master disposal box.
Range: 40 - 50
Setting Units: 1
Default: 50
387 Master removal print drum speed
Sets the print drum speed for master removal.
Description
* Master removal feed motor speed is fixed.
Range: 10 - 60 rpm
Setting Units 5 rpm
Default: 15 rpm
389 Software count clear
Description Clears program count for removed masters.
Setting None

16 – 15
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
DATA SETTING

No. Name
481 Paper feed clutch ON angle adjustment
Description Adjusts angle timing for activating paper feed clutch.
Range: -200 - +200 (-20.0° - +20.0°) * (+ delays ON timing)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: 0°
482 Paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment (standard)
Adjusts angle timing for deactivating the paper feed clutch according to the paper
Description
type (standard).
Range: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays OFF timing)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: 0°
483 Paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment (card)
Adjusts angle timing for deactivating the paper feed clutch according to the paper
Description
type (card).
Range: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays OFF timing)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: 0°
484 Paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment (thin paper)
Adjusts angle timing for deactivating paper the feed clutch according to the paper
Description
type (thin paper).
Range: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays OFF timing)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: 0°
485 Paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment (special)
Adjusts angle timing for deactivating the paper feed clutch according to the paper
Description
type (special).
Range: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays OFF timing)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: 0°
486 First stage paper feed jam detection angle adjustment
Description Sets angle timing for detecting the first-stage paper feed jam.
Range: -200 - +200 (-20.0° - +20.0°) * (+ delays detection)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: 0°
487 Paper ejection IN jam detection angle adjustment
Description Adjusts the angle used to detect paper jams during paper ejection.
Range: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays detection)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: 0°
488 Paper ejection IN jam detection angle adjustment
Description Adjusts the angle used to detect paper jams during paper ejection.
Range: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays detection)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: 0°

16 – 16
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
DATA SETTING

No. Name
580 Master detection angle adjustment
Description Adjusts the angle used to detect master loading.
Range: -200 - +100 (-20.0° - +10.0°) * (+ delays detection)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: 0°
581 Position A stop position adjustment
Description Adjusts the print drum position A stop position.
Range: -40 - +40 (-4.0° - +4.0°) * (+ increases distance from stop)
Setting Units: 2 (0.2°)
Default: -20 (-2.0°)
583 No ink time (normal)
Description Sets no ink detection time.
Range: 1 - 127 s
Setting Units: 1s
Default: 20 s
584 No ink time (at replacement)
Description Sets no-ink detection time after replacing the ink cartridge.
Range: 1 - 127 s
Setting Units: 1s
Default: 40 s
585 Overflow detection cycles
Sets detection cycles for the overflow sensor to determine that an overflow has
Description
occurred. (This data is stored on print drum EEPROM.)
Range: 1 - 200 cycles
Setting Units: 1 cycle
Default: 50 cycles
586 Minimum print drum speed for inking
Description Sets the minimum print drum speed for inking.
Range: 5 - 100 rpm
Setting Units: 5 rpm
Default: 15 rpm
588 Print drum code
Description Sets the print drum code. (See page 16-18 for print drum code settings.)
Range: 0 - 16
Units: 1
Setting
Default: 0
* Run Test mode No. 557 (inking operation) after setting.
589 Proof-read print speed table (black ink)
Description Sets speed table for determining speed proof-read print.
Range: 0 (slow), 1 (normal), 2 (fast)
Setting
Default: 1 (normal)
590 Proof-read print speed table (color ink)
Description Sets the speed table for determining the speed proof-read print.
Range: 0 (slow), 1 (normal), 2 (fast)
Setting
Default: 1 (normal)

16 – 17
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE
DATA SETTING

No. Name
680 Vertical print home position adjustment
Description Sets offset for vertical print home position.
Range: -100 - +500 (-10.0 mm - +50.0 mm) * (+ is upwards)
Setting Units: 1 (0.1 mm)
Default: 0
682 Print pressure home position adjustment
Description Sets offset for print pressure home position
Range: -50 - +50 pulses * (+ compresses)
Setting Units: 1 pulse
Default: 0 pulses

Print Drum Code Settings

Code Size Type Compatible machines

1 Black
A3
2 Color

3 Black
B4 RN2050 / RN2150
4 Color

5 Black
A4 RN2000 / RN2100
6 Color

7 Black
A4R
8 Color

9 Black
Ledger
10 Color

11 Black
Legal RN2030 / RN2130
12 Color

13 Black
Letter
14 Color

15 Black
Spare
16 Color

16 – 18
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 17: USERS MODE

Contents

1. Customizing the Initial Setting .................................................................................. 1-2

17 – 1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 17. USERS MODE
CUSTOMIZING THE INITIAL SETTINGS

1. Customizing the Initial Settings

17 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 17. USERS MODE
CUSTOMIZING THE INITIAL SETTINGS

17 – 3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 17. USERS MODE
CUSTOMIZING THE INITIAL SETTINGS

17 – 4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 17. USERS MODE
CUSTOMIZING THE INITIAL SETTINGS

17 – 5
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 18: MISCELLANEOUS PRECAUTIONS

Contents

1. ROM Replacement ....................................................................................................... 18-2


2. Battery Replacement .................................................................................................... 18-2
3. Main PCB Replacement ............................................................................................... 18-2
4. Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB Replacement ................................................................ 18-2
5. Print Position Adjustment ............................................................................................. 18-3
6. Notes on Stay Assembly .............................................................................................. 18-3

18 – 1
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 18. MISCELLANEOUS PRECAUTIONS
ROM REPLACEMENT

1. ROM Replacement
Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and then replace the ROM on the main PCB.
* When replacing the ROM, it is not necessary to clear or set data.

2. Battery Replacement
Replace the battery on the main PCB with the power to the main unit switched on.
* Data may be lost if the power to the main unit is not switched on.

3. Main PCB Replacement


(1) Note down the following details before replacement.
• User mode
• Test mode setting change data
(2) Switch off the power and replace the Main PCB.
(3) Remove the battery, IC18 and ROM from the old Main PCB, and install them on the new Main PCB.
(4) Start Test mode.
(5) Run Test mode No. 80 (Jam clear).
(6) Run Test mode No. 81 (Memory clear).
(7) Run Test mode No. 82 (Test mode data setting clear).
(8) Disable the solenoid counter using Test mode No. 95 (Solenoid counter enable/disable setting).
(when the solenoid counter must be disabled for replacement.)
(9) Run Test mode No. 588 (Print drum code) and enter print drum code currently set. (See page 16-
18.)
(10) Run Test mode No. 557 (Inking).
(11) Run Test mode No. 450 (Paper width VR adjustment 105 mm) and Test mode No. 451 (Paper width
VR adjustment 210 mm) in sequence.
(12) Enter the details noted down in step (1).

4. Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB Replacement


(1) Pull out the print drum, and replace the Ink cartridge set switch PCB .
(2) Mount the print drum in the main unit.
(3) Start Test mode.
(4) Disable the solenoid counter using Test mode No. 95 (Solenoid counter enable/disable setting).
(when the solenoid counter must be disabled for replacement.)
(5) Run Test mode No. 588 (Print drum code) and enter the print drum code currently set. (See page
16-18.)
(6) Run Test mode No. 557 (Inking).
(7) Switch on power again.

18 – 2
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 18. MISCELLANEOUS PRECAUTIONS
PRINT POSITION ADJUSTMENT

5. Print Position Adjustment


(1) Adjust master creation image elongation and shrinkage. (See page 13-20.)
(2) Adjust scanning image elongation and shrinkage. (See page 11-22 for flat bed unit, and page 12-24
for ADF unit.)
(3) Adjust the master clamp amount. (See page 13-20.)
(4) Adjust scanning start position. (See page 11-23 for flat bed unit, and page 12-22 for ADF unit.)
(5) Adjust the master making start position. (See 13-21.)
(6) Adjust the vertical print home position.
• If the print position is offset from the original even after performing adjustment steps (1) to (5),
measure the offset, and adjust by the offset amount in Test mode No. 680 (Vertical print home
position).
* The print position adjustment procedures assume that the mechanical sections, such as the main unit
drive section, paper feed section, and print drum, have been correctly adjusted. Check and adjust the
mechanical sections first.
Likewise, set the data for ADF section adjustment only after mechanically adjusting the flat bed unit.

6. Notes on Stay Assembly


The stay assembly on the main unit drive section is positioned using jigs during factory assembly. Do not
loosen or remove the stay assembly mounting screws, as the stay cannot be repositioned once removed.

Stay assembly

18 – 3
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CHAPTER 18. MISCELLANEOUS PRECAUTIONS

[Memo]

18 – 4
RN (Version 1.0)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

CHAPTER 19 DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

Contents
1.CONNECTIONS
1)BLOCK CHART .............................................................................................. 19-2
2)POWER SUPPLY AREA ................................................................................. 19-3
3)PANEL CONTROL AREA ............................................................................... 19-4
4)MOTOR CONTROL AREA .............................................................................. 19-5
5)MASTER REMOVAL AREA ............................................................................ 19-6
6)PAPER FEED AREA ...................................................................................... 19-7
7)PRINT DRUM AREA ....................................................................................... 19-8
8)PAPER EJECTION AREA .............................................................................. 19-9
9)MASTER MAKING AREA ............................................................................. 19-10
10)SCANNER AREA ....................................................................................... 19-11
11)OPTIONS .................................................................................................... 19-12
2.LOCATION OF PCBS ........................................................................................ 19-13
3..PCB FUNCTION DETAIL .................................................................................. 19-14
4.SYSTEM PCB ................................................................................................... 19-15
5.POWER SUPPLY UNIT ..................................................................................... 19-16
6.DRIVE PCB....................................................................................................... 19-18
7.PANEL CONTROL PCB .................................................................................... 19-19
8.PRINT DRUM CONTROL PCB .......................................................................... 19-20
9.ADF PCB .......................................................................................................... 19-21

COLOR ABBREVIATION IS AS FOLLOWS

W:WHITE R:RED
BL:BLUE B:BLACK
BR:BROWN O:ORANGE
Y:YELLOW GY:GRAY
GN:GREEN V:VIOLET

《2000.07.11》
[ 19 − 1 ]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PANEL CONTROL
AREA PRINT DRUM AREA
MASTER REMOVAL CN301
AREA

CN302
1)Block Chart

CN202 CN208
1.Connections

PAPER FEED AREA REJECT PANEL


/MOTOR CONTROL
RIGHT SIDE FRONT MOTOR CONTROL
DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

CN204
DRIVE AREA
CN203 CN406 CN407

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CN403 CN404

PAPER EJECTION
SUCTION
/CLUMP CN205
/MOTOR CONTROL
LEFT SIDE SYSTEM−PCB
CN103 CN107
021-50500 POWER SUPPLY AREA FILTER PCB
CN101
POWER CN104
CN201
SCANNER CN106 CN102
CN211 CN105
SCANNER AREA

[ 19 − 2 ]
TPH
FB/ADF CN212
CN207
MASTER MAKING
RINC2 AREA
CN214 MMU
CN206

C/I OPTION
CN213 CN218 MAIN SW RELAY PCB
STS
CN209 CARD
CN210

OPTIONS
5566-12A 5557-12R 5557-12R 5566-12A PSUNIT B3B-EH-A DF1B-4S-2.5R DF1B-4P-2.5DS
1 W OPOWER-FAIL 1 1 O +24V 1
2 BL OPOWER-OFF 2
(POWER SUPPLY UNIT)
2
3 B GND 3 CN107 2 CN401
4 R 4 3
SYSTEM−PCB +5V
5 BR GND2 5 021-50508 3 O RELAY 4
6 O +24VG 6
7 O 7 021-51037
+24VC CN104 F5 8A/125VAC
8 W OTPH_ENB 8
CN201 24V-M 5566-10A 5557-10R 5557-8R 5566-8A
9 B GND 9
10 R +5V 10 F4 3.15A/125VAC 1 O +24VM 1
11 BR GND2 11 2 BR GND2 2
12 O +24VB 12 24V-G 3 O +24VA 3
DRIVE−PCB
F2 3.15A/125VAC 4 R +5V 4
021-51000 24V 5 R
24V-A CN103 6 BR GND3 5 CN405
021-50500 F3 3.15A/125VAC 7 BR GND2 6
8 O +24VB 7
24V-B 9 B GND1 8
F6 3.15A/125VAC 10 B

24V-C 021-51000 021-50506


VHR-2N B4P2-VH

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PANEL CONTROL
2)POWER SUPPLY AREA

S14B-XH-A XHP-14 DF1B-14DS-2.5RC


+5V 1
1 BR -S 1
UNIT
2 R GND4 2 GND1 2
3 O GND4 3 CN302
TPH 4 Y GND4 4 B3P5-VH VHR-5N
5 GN GND4 5 5
6 BL GND4 6 18v Circuit 021-50502 4
18V POWER SUPPLY UNIT;SC3K
7 V GND4 7 PNL-CTL-PCB 3 W
8 GY +18V 8 2
CN106 101-51001-004
9 W +18V 9
10 B +18V 10 1 B
11 BR +18V 11 Interlock Input
018-60031-007 12 R +18V 12
13 O +18V 13
XHP-4
1
2
3
4

TPH260R30 14 Y +S 14
GND BL
B06P-VL VLP-06V BL
AC ( L)
AC ( N)

GND
021-51002 W AC IN(N) VCC R
1
021-51062 VCC R
021-51045

GROUND DF1B-14P-2.5DSA
GROUND 2
1

4
3
2

B AC IN(L) XHP-4
3
MASTER LOADING UNIT MASTER LOADING UNIT MAIN BODY FRAME CN102

[ 19 − 3 ]
4 W AC OUT(N) B 1 CN803
VHR-7N B4P7-VH
5 RELAY-PCB
B AC IN(L) 1 3 1
F1 10A/125VAC B AC OUT(L) W 021-50507-009
2 6
2
CN110 CN109 3 SW-OUT(L) AC SUPPLY 021-51038 CN802 3
4 CN101 CN801
5 175487-2 179228-2 B 6 4
021-50509 6 5
W AC IN(N) 7 1
Input Fil CN105 W 8 CN804 B3P5-VH VHR-5N
CN108 2
VHR-8N B8B-VH B5B-XH-A
021-51035 XHP-5
5
1

4
3
2

B3B-XH-A
GROUND

Main SW (Matsushita) TERMINAL FOR ADJUSTING


179228-2 TPH THERMAL POWER 1 2 3 021-51039
GND
GND

VCC

FRAME
5 BR +24VB
021-51047
R
VCC O
Y
BR

6 R APO(Auto Power Off out)


PWRCTRL GN

2 AC IN(L) B 6 6 B
5
4
3
2
1

5 6


4 AC IN(N) W 4 4 W 021-51046
3 4 RINC2
PLUG 1 AC OUT(L) B 3 3 B
1 2

3 AC OUT(N) W 1 1 W
444-20000-003
AJ8R2014BC VLP-06V VLR-06V

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS
1 KOUT0 1
2 KOUT1 2
SM02(8.0)B-BHS-1-TB
1 3 KOUT2 3
MCT36pin MCT36pin AS MCT36pin AS MCT36pin CN304 2 4 KOUT3 4
3-353308-6 1-353293-8*2 1-353293-8*2 3-353308-6
5 KOUT4 5
6 KIN0 6
36(18) OWR 1 52207-1217 7 KIN1 7
35(17) GND 2 12 S 1 8 KIN2 8
34(16) ORD 3 11 CP1 2 9 KIN3 9
33(15) GND 4 10 CP2 3 LM32018T:SHARP 10 KIN4 10
32(14) OCS 5 11 KIN5 11
9 N.C. 4
31(13) GND 6
(LCD) 12 KIN6 12
8 DISP OFF 5 DETAIL
30(12) A4 7 7 D0 6 484-60002 13 KIN7 13
29(11) GND 8 CN303 6 D1 7 14 VCC(CI) 14
DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

28(10) A3 9 5 D2 8 15 GND(CI) 15
27(9) GND 10 4 D3 9 16 OCI-SW 16
CN305 CN309
26(8) A2 11 3 VDD 10 17 OCI-LED 17
25(7) GND 12 2 VSS 11 18 COM0 18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


24(6) A1 13 1 VEE 12 19 COM1 19
3)PANEL CONTROL AREA

23(5) GND 14 20 COM2 20


22(4) A0 15 PNL-CTL-PCB FLAT CABLE 21 COM3 21
21(3) GND 16 22 SCK 22
SYSTEM-PCB 20(2) VCC(CI)
021-50502 23 LATCH 23
17
19(1) GND(CI) 18 MAIN-SW-PCB 24 SOUT 24
021-50500 25 SOUT-RET 25
1 LED2 1
021-50503 26 VCC 26
2 LED4 2
CN311 3 COM1 3 27 VCC 27
CN301 CN313
CN208 4 LED2 4 28 VCC 28
18 OLED-K 19(18) 5 LED1 5 29 GND 29
17 OSW 20(17) 6 COM0 6 30 GND 30
D7 21(16)
7SEG-PCB 31 GND 31
16 CN305 CN309
15 GND 22(15) 021-50511 32 GND 32
14 D6 23(14) COM3 1
1
13 GND 24(13) LED6 2
2
12 D5 25(12) LED7 CN314
CN312 3 3
11 GND 26(11) COM2 4
4
D4 27(10)

[ 19 − 4 ]
10 5 LED5 5
1 KOUT4 1
9 GND 28(9) LED0 6
6 2 KOUT5 2
8 D3 29(8)
3 KOUT6 3
7 GND 30(7)
4 KOUT7 4
6 D2 31(6)
5 KIN0 5
5 GND 32(5)
6 KIN1 6
4 D1 33(4) SUB-SW-PCB
7 KIN2 7
3 GND 34(3) BOARD TO BOARD
021-50504 8 KIN3 8
2 D0 35(2)
9 KIN4 9
1 GND 36(1)
CN306 CN310 10 KIN5 10
11 KIN6 11
12 KIN7 12
13 COM0 13
CN306 CN310
14 COM1 14
CN307 CN302 15 COM2 15
021-51014 16 COM3 16
DETAIL 17 SCK 17
18 LATCH 18
19 SOUT-RET 19

2
1
2P-VH 20 VCC 20
21 VCC 21
CONNECTER FOR 22 VCC 22
23 GND 23
ADJUSTING LCD CONTRAST
24 GND 24
25 GND 25
POWER SUPPLY AREA(CN103) 26 GND 26

021-50021
PANEL CONTROL AREA
GP1A73A
GP1A73A
KH0542
KH0542
LED

COUNTER
COUNTER

SOL
VCC

OUT
GND
GND

DESCENT BUTTON

021-50024
VCC

LOWER LIMIT SENSOR

FLAT BED SET SW


2
1
2
1
2
1
3 GND
2 OUT
1 VCC
3 GND
2 OUT
1 VCC

FRONT COVER SET SW


PAPER SENSOR(SEND)

PRINT DRUM SAFETY SW


PAPER SENSOR(RECEIVE)
PRINT DRUM RELEASE SW

DISPOSAL BOX SAFETY SW


1
1
2
3
4

PRINT DRUM LOCK SOLENOID

1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
5
1
2
2
3
4
5

CT2pin AS
173977-2
3
CT2pin AS TOTAL COUNT
173977-2
CT5pin AS
173977-5
CT4pin AS
173977-4

CT2pin AS
173977-2
CT2pin AS MASTER COUNT
173977-2

PAPER FEED TRAY SAFETY SW


CT6pin AS FEED TRAY
173977-6
CT6pin AS UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
173977-6

HRS
DF1BA-3EP-2.5RC
HRS
DF1BA-3EP-2.5RC
HRS
DF1BA-3EP-2.5RC
HRS
DF1BA-3EP-2.5RC
1
4
3
2
1

4
2

6
3

1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
1
5
4
2
1

CT5pin AS
173977-5
CT4pin AS
173977-4

CT2pin AS
173977-6
CT2pin AS
173977-2
VCC

GND
VCC

HRS
DF1B-3S-2.5R
HRS
DF1B-3S-2.5R
HRS
DF1B-3S-2.5R
GND

KP-SEN

HRS
DF1B-3S-2.5R
HRS
DF1B-3S-2.5R

N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C

01 +24VM
02
03 FB-ASW
04
05
06
07 FB-ASW
08 N.C
09 TPH-ASW
01 +24VB
02 SET_SW1
03 N.C
04 SET_SW1
05
06 SET_SW2
07 SET_SW2
08 N.C
09 SET_SW3
10
11
12
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13(01)
14(02)
15(03)
16(04)
17(05)
18(06)
19(07)
20(08)
21(09)
22(10)
23(11)
24(12)

CT4pin AS
DF9pin AC DF12pin AC 173977-4
MCT24pin AS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DF1B-9S-2.5R DF1B-12S-2.5R
1-353293-2*2 A01
021-51037 021-51037 4
021-51013 A02
CN404 CN408 3
CN402 A03 MASTER REMOVAL AREA
4)MOTOR CONTROL AREA

2
A04
1 021-50024
CT2pin AS
173977-2
MCT34pin AS DRIVE-PCB 021-50506 A05
1-353293-7 2 1 2 PAPER EJECTION/CLUMP
A06 /MOTOR CONTROL LEFT SIDE
01 GND 34(17) 1 2 1
51022-02
02 MM-PWM 33(16) 021-50027
03 GND 32(15) CT2pin AS CT2pin AS
04 MM-BRK 31(14) CN407 173977-2 173977-2
05 GND 30(13) 021-51009 CN403 A07
2 1
06 ELV-SCL 29(12) DF10pin AC VH3pin AC A08
DF1B-10DS-2.5R B3P-VH 1 2 SOL
07 ELV-LAT 28(11)
08 ELV-DAT 27(10)
09 GND 26(09) CT2pin AS PRESSURE SOLENOID
CT2pin AS
10 ELV-IN 25(08) 173977-2 173977-2
01
02
03

11 GND 24(07) A11


2 1 2 1
12 DRM-TXD 23(06) A12
1 2 1 2
13 DRM-RXD 22(05)
021-51051
14 P-OFF 21(04)
021-51012
CT24pin AS
1-173977-2*2

15 20(03) CT6pin AS ELEVATOR MOTOR


PS-LAT 173977-6

[ 19 − 5 ]
16 PS-CLK 19(02)
17 CTL-ENB 18(01) CN406 CN409 B01
6
18(01) SW-IN 17 B02
5
N.C

M_MOTOR(-)
M_MOTOR(+)

19(02) GND B03


16 4

MCT34pin AS
1-353293-7
021-51012
20(03) B04
TBM-SCK 15 3
21(04) TBM-LAT 14
DRUM AREA B05
2
22(05) TBM-DAT 13 B06
1
23(06) GND 12 CT6pin AS PRINT POSITIONING
24(07) PRSM-SCK 11 173977-6
25(08) PRSM-LAT 10 B07
PULSE MOTOR
6 1 6
VCC
TCKA
GND

26(09) PRSM-DAT 09 B08


5 2 5
MAIN MOTOR

27(10) GND 08 B09


4 3 4
28(11) SP-SCK 07 B10
3 4 3
01
02
03

29(12) 06 B11
SP-LAT 2 5 2
30(13) SP-DAT 05 B12
1 6 1
31(14) GND 04
021-51065 021-51022A(CN13,14)
32(15) PAPER-SEN 03 CN401 MAIN MOTOR FG SENSOR
33(16) ELV-UPPER 02 CN405
021-51000 021-51037 PAPER FEED AREA PRESSURE CONTROL MOTOR
34(17) ELV-LOWER 01 MOLEX8pin AC DF4pin AC
5557-8R DF1B-4S-2.5R

SYSTEM−PCB
(CN203)

POWER SUPPLY AREA


MOTOR CONTROL AREA (CN103/107)
DESCRIPTION OF PCBS
GP1A73A : LIGHT BEAM BLOCKED → HIGH

CT12pin CT12pin
MCT12pin 1-173977-2 1-173977-2 CT3pin
MASTER COMPRESSION SENSOR
1-353297-2 1-353293-2 173977-3
12 VCC 1 12 VCC 1 INTERRUPT
VCC
11 HA-SEN 2 11 HA-SEN 2 TYPE SENSOR
OUT
10 GND 3 10 GND 3
GND GP1A73A

175487-3
DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

SYSTEM-PCB
9 VCC 4 9 VCC 1 INTERRUPT
VCC
8 HM-SEN 5 8 HM-SEN 2 TYPE SENSOR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OUT DISPOSAL BOX FULL SENSOR
7 GND 6 7 GND 3 GP1A73A
GND
5)MASTER REMOVAL AREA

CN202 175487-3

6 VCC 7 6 VCC 1 REFLECTIVE


VCC
5 MAS-SEN 8 5 MAS-SEN 2 TYPE SENSOR MASTER SENSOR
OUT
4 GND 9 4 GND 3 KH0726
GND

175487-3

3 VCC 10 3 VCC 1 INTERRUPT


VCC
2 HJ-SEN 11 2 HJ-SEN 2 TYPE SENSOR MASTER REMOVAL SENSOR
OUT
1 GND 12 1 GND 3 GP1A73A
GND
021-51043 021-51054
175487-3

[ 19 − 6 ]
CT4pin CT2pin CT2pin
DRIVE−PCB(CN409) 173977-4 173977-2 173977-2
1 HA-MO(-) 2 1 HA-MO(-) STARTING CURRENT 500mA
MASTER COMPRESSION MOTOR
2 HA-MO(+) 1 2 HA-MO(+) φ28 RATED CURRENT  80mA

STARTING CURRENT 1800mA
3 +24V 2 1 +24V
4 HO-MO 1 2 HO-MO MASTER REMOVAL MOTOR
φ36
RATED CURRENT  550mA
021-51054 CT2pin CT2pin
173977-2 173977-2

DRIVE−PCB(CN404)
3 3 3
2
1 1 1

021-51054 DISPOSAL BOX SAFETY SW


AM50031C431F1
HRS  HRS  HRS 
DF1BA-3EP-2.5RC DF1B-3S-2.5R DF1BA-3EP-2.5RC

MASTER REMOVAL AREA


MCT22pin MCT11pin*2
2-353308-2 1-353293-1*2

CT9pin CT9pin CT3pin CT3pin PAPER WIDTH POTENTIOMETER


173977-9 179228-9 179228-3 179228-3
VOLTAGE DOWN BY CLOCKWISE ROTATION
1 V VCC 9 1 BR VCC 3 1 1
2 V KY-VR 8 2 R KY-VR 2 2 2
3 V GND 7 3 O GND 1 3 3

CRV16-1KΩ

CT3pin
179228-3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION SENSOR
6)PAPER FEED AREA

4 V GND 6 4 Y GND 3 REFLECTIVE


GND
5 V KY-SEN 5 5 GN KY-SEN 2 TYPE SENSOR

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OUT PAPER DETECTED → LOW
6 V VCC 4 6 BL VCC 1 GP2A25
VCC

175487-3

CT3pin
CN204 179228-3
PAPER DETECTION SENSOR
V GND V GND GND
7 3 7 3 REFLECTIVE
SYSTEM-PCB 8 V KU-SEN 2 8 GY KU-SEN 2 TYPE SENSOR
OUT PAPER DETECTED → LOW
9 V VCC 1 9 W VCC 1
VCC GP2A25
10
11 175487-3
021-51019

173977-4
12 (1)
+24V
13 (2) V 4

[ 19 − 7 ]
14 (3) 3 PAPER FEED CRUTCH

15 (4) 2 RATED CURRENT 0.155A


16 (5) V KYUSI_CRA 1
GP1A73A:LIGHT BEAM BLOCKED→ HIGH
173977-3 GP2A25:LIGHT BEAM REFLECTED→ LOW
021-50500 17 (6) V GND 3
GND INTERRUPT
18 (7) V TEN-CHI 2 VERTICAL CENTERING SENSOR
OUT TYPE SENSOR
19 (8) V VCC 1
VCC GP1A73A

173977-3 MOTOR CONTROL AREA


20 (9) V GND 3
GND 021-50023
21 (10)V TCKA 2
VCC OUT
22 (11)V 1
VCC

MAIN MOTOR ENCODER SENSOR

021-51012

PAPER FEED AREA


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS
PRINT DRUM UNIT(BLACK/COLOR)

INK CARTRIDGE SET SW


PCB
DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

MOTOR CONTROL AREA


7)PRINT DRUM AREA

021-51020
(CN407) QR12pin AC

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


QR12pin AC
021-50505(DRM-PCB;BK)
QR/P8-12P-C(01) 021-51010
QR/P8-12S-C(01) 021-50510(DRM-PCB;CL) 01 VCC 05
V VCC
PGND 01 01 PGND 01 02 04
BR BR V DRUM-THERMISTOR
BR OUT
+24V 02 02 +24V 02 03 03
R R CN502 V INK-SENSOR
R OUT YAA81-0062
GND 03 03 GND 03 04 02
O O V OVERFLOW-SENSOR
O OUT
VCC 04 04 04 05 01
Y VCC Y V GND
Y CN501 GND
05 05 05

CT5pin AS
175489-5
N.C N.C GN
06 06 06 INK SENSOR
N.C N.C BL
POWER-OFF 07 07 POWER-OFF 07
V GN
DRUM-RXD 08 08 08

DF8pin AC
DF1B-8DS-2.5R
GY V DRUM-TXD V
DRUM-TXD 09 09 DRUM-RXD
W BL
DRAWER CONNECTION
DRUM-SET 10 10 DRUM-SET CN504 021-51010
B GY GY
11 11
N.C N.C
12 F.G 01 GND 03
12 BL GND

[ 19 − 8 ]
GN F.G GN
02 02
BL DRUM-SET
021-51009 OUT GP1A75E
03 01
BL VCC
VCC
CT3pin AS
175489-3

PRINT DRUM SET SENSOR

TERMINAL FOR M4 TAP

CN503
SM2pin AC SM2pin AC
SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N

01 01 01 01
B INK-MOTOR-
02 02 02 02
R INK-MOTOR+

INK CARTRIDGE
XH2pin AC
XHP-2

SET SENSOR 021-51010 INKING MOTOR


SYSTEM−PCB SUCTION UNIT
MCT24pin AS CT7pin AS CT7pin AS CT3pin AS
(CN205) 1-353293-2*2
021-51022
173977-7 173977-7 173977-3

07 01 03
01 V V GND
021-50500 02 CONV-ENCD 06 02 02
V V OUT GP1A73A
03 VCC 05 03 01
V V VCC
04 CONV-MOT
V
05 +24V
V CT2pin AS CT2pin AS PAPER EJECTION MOTOR
06 +24V
V 173977-2 173977-2 ENCODER SENSOR
07 SUCKTION
V 04 04 V 02 01
08 +24V
V 03 05 01 02
V
09 SEPARATION
V
10 GND
V
11 PAPER RECEIVING SENSOR CT2pin AS CT2pin AS
PAPER EJECTION MOTOR
V
12 GND 173977-2 173977-2
V
PAPER RECEIVING SENSOR 02 06 02 01

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


13 V V
14 VCC 01 07 01 02
V V
GND
8)PAPER EJECTION AREA

15(01) V CT3pin AS
PRESS-HP 173977-3
021-51024
16(02) V
VCC 03
SUCTION FAN
17(03) V GND
GND 02
18(04) V OUT GP1A73A
DETECT-A 01
19(05) V VCC
VCC
20(06) V
GND PRINT PRESSURE CONTROL SENSOR
21(07) V
CLAMP-B CT3pin AS
22(08) V 173977-3
VCC
23(09) V 021-51053
03 01 03
GND GND
24(10) V BR
02 02 02
CLAMP-A OUT
25(11) V R GP1A75E
01 03 01
VCC VCC
26(12) V O
27(13) SEPARATION FAN UNIT
28(14) POSITION A SENSOR CT5pin AS CT5pin AS
173977-8 173977-8
CT2pin AS CT2pin AS
08 01 173977-2 173977-2

[ 19 − 9 ]
CT6pin AS CT6pin AS CT3pin AS 06 02 02 01
V
173977-6 173977-6 173977-3 07 03 01 02
V
06 01 03
V GND
05 02 02 CT2pin AS CT2pin AS
V OUT GP1A73A
04 03 01 173977-2 173977-2 SEPARATION FAN
V VCC
05 04 02 01
V
CLAMP SENSOR B 04 05 01 02
V
CT3pin AS
173977-3

03 04 03 SEPARATION FAN
V GND 03 06 03
05 V GND
02 02
V OUT GP1A73A 02 07 02
01 06 01 V OUT GP2A200LCS
V VCC 01 08 01
V VCC
021-51023
CLAMP SENSOR A CT3pin AS
021-51025
173977-3
CT2pin AS CT2pin AS
PAPER RECEIVING SENSOR
173977-2 173977-2

DRIVE−PCB(CN409) 05
06

012−50023 CLAMP MOTOR

CLAMP UNIT

PAPER EJECTION AREA


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS
CT6pin AS CT6pin AS CT3pin AS
021-51022 173977-6 173977-6 021-51041 173977-3 MASTER LOADING
01 GND 01 03 UNIT SWITCH
V V
02 MASTER LOADING UNIT SW 02 02 GND
V V GP1A73A
03 +5V 03 01 OUT
V V VCC
04 GND 04 03
V V MASTER STOCKER UNIT
05 MASTER END SENSOR 05 02 GND
V V OUT KI1215-RK
06 +5V 06 01
V V VCC
07 +24V
08 CT3pin AS
173977-3 MASTER END SENSOR

09 WRITE PULSE MOTOR A 06


V
10 WRITE PULSE MOTOR B 05
V
11 +24V 04
V
12 +24V 03 WRITE PULSE MOTOR
V
13 WRITE PULSE MOTOR A 02
V
14 WRITE PULSE MOTOR B 01
V
15
DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

N.C
16 N.C CT6pin AS
17 CUTTER MOTOR+ 04 01 173977-6
V
18 CUTTER MOTOR- 03 02 CUTTER MOTOR
V
19 GND 02 03
V
01 04 021-51003

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


20 CUTTER HOME POSITION SW
V CUTTER HOME POSITION SW
01 CODE2 BR
9)MASTER MAKING AREA

02 CODE4
R
21(01) LOAD PULSE MOTOR A V 06 03 CODE3
O
22(02) LOAD PULSE MOTOR B V 05 04 THERMISTOR
Y
23(03) +24V V 04 05 CODE0
GN
24(04) +24V V 03 LOAD PULSE MOTOR 06 CODE1
BL
25(05) LOAD PULSE MOTOR A V 02 07 STB1
V
CN206 26(06) LOAD PULSE MOTOR B V 01 08 CLK1 GY
09 LATCH1
W
CT6pin AS 10 DATA1
B
173977-6 11 GND
BR
12 GND
R
27(07) GND V 03 01 BR 03 13 GND
O
28(08) MASTER POSITIONING SENSOR V 02 02 02 GND KH0726 14 +5V
R Y
29(09) +5V V 01 03 O 01 OUT MASTER POSITIONING SENSOR CN212 15 +5V
VCC GN
16 +5V
SYSTEM-PCB 021-51053 CT3pin AS BL TPH
17 STB2
173977-3 V
18 CLK2
GY
021-50500 19 LATCH2
W
20 DATA2
B
21 STB3
THERMAL PRESSURE MOTOR BR
22 CLK3
CT8pin AS CT2pin AS CT2pin AS R
173977-8 173977-2 173977-2 23 LATCH3
O
24 DATA3
THERMAL PRESSURE MOTOR+
Y
30(10) 08 01 02 01 25 STB4

[ 19 − 10 ]
GN
31(11) THERMAL PRESSURE MOTOR- 07 02 01 02 26 CLK4
BL
27 LATCH4
V
32(12) GND 06 03 03 01 03 28 DATA4
GND Y GY
33(13) TPH PRESSURE SENSOR 05 04 02 02 02 GP1A73A
05 01 03 01 OUT R TPH PRESSURE
34(14) +5V 04
VCC O (SHARP) SENSOR
021-51053
35(15) GND 03 06 03 DETAIL
36(16) MASTER DETECTION SENSOR 02 07 02 GND KH0726
08 01 OUT MASTER DETECTION
37(17) +5V 01 (HAMAMATSU KODEN)
VCC SENSOR
38(18) GND
39(19) SPARE CT3pin AS
173977-3
40(20) +5V

MASTER LOADING UNIT


021-51003

CN212 TPH
DETAIL
01 24VG 01
02 PGND 02
HIF3BA-34PA-2.54DSA
03 LAMP 03
B34B-PHDSS(JST) 04 NC 04
PHDR-34VS(JST) 05 05
SMP-04V-NC(JST) NC
34 34 1 HV11 06 SD1 06
33 33 2 07 SCLK 07
32 32 CN1 3 08 /SDEN 08
4 HV12 09 09
06FE-BT-VK-N(JST) SD0
06FE-BT-VK-N(JST) 10 10
/LAMP /LST
6 1 11 11
5 PGND 2 TRIG
CN211 SMP-04V-NC(JST) 12 GND 12
4 24VB 3 1 HV21
3 3 CCD PCB 3 4 2 13 DCLK 13
2 2 2 5 3 14 14
GND
1 1 4
10)SCANNER AREA

1 6 HV22 15 15
CN2 VD0
6芯FFC 16 GND 16
17 VD1 17
MCT19pin*2 18 GND 18
3-353308-8 1-353293-9*2 INVERTER 19 VD2 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


19 20 GND 20
51090-0300(MOLEX) 21 21
18 MCT15pin*2 MCT15pin*2 FIP24-16N2-U2(NEC) VD3
17 1-353293-5 OR 52484-0310(MOLEX) 22 GND 22
1-353293-5
16 1 OUT REFLECTIVE 23 23
VD4
15 V VCC 16(1) 30(15) V 1 12 VCC 2 VCC TYPE SENSOR FLAT BED ORIGINAL DETECTION SENSOR 24 24
14 V GEK_SEN 17(2) 29(14) V 2 11 GEK_SEN 3 GND
13 V GND 18(3) 28(13) V 3 10 GND GND EY3A-1081 25 VD5 25
26 GND 26
27 VD6 27
23
28 GND 23
28
29 VD7 29
12 V VCC 19(4) 27(12) V 4 9 VCC PHR-3 OR 03KR-06S(JST) 30 GND 30
11 V AHP-SEN 20(5) 26(11) V 5 8 AHP-SEN
10 V GND 21(6) 25(10) V 6 7 GND 1 INTERRUPT 31 31
GND 5V
2 OUT TYPE SENSOR IMAGE SCANNER ADF SHADING SENSOR 32 32
5V
3 VCC 33 33
GP1A75E3 24V
34 34
24V

9 V FB-OB 22(7) 24(9) V 7 6 FB-OB


8 V FB-OA 23(8) 23(8) V 8 5 FB-OA SMP-06V0NC(JST)
7 V FB-CB 24(9) 22(7) V 9 4 FB-CB LAMP LAMP
6 V FB-CA 25(10) 21(6) V 10 3 FB-CA 1 1
5 V FB-B 26(11) 20(5) V 11 2 FB-B 2 2 CF×8AE×D/34HB CF×8AE×D/34HB
4 V FB-A 27(12) 19(4) V 12 1 FB-A 3 3
4 4 FLAT BED READ PULSE MOTOR
5 5
6 6
CT12pin CT12pin
1-173977-2 1-173977-2

[ 19 − 11 ]
CN207
3 V VCC 28(13) 18(3) V 1 VCC INTERRUPT
2 V OUT 29(14) 17(2) V 2 OUT TYPE SENSOR
1 V GND 30(15) 16(1) V 3 GND STAGE COVER SENSOR
GP1A73A

CT3pin
173977-3
CT15pin
1-173977-5
38(19) V GND 1 15 V 1
37(18) V OADF-EXIT 2 14 V 2
36(17) V ADF-SEN 3 13 V 3 SCANNER UNIT(300DPI)
35(16) V OUT-SEN 4 12 V 4 GP1A75E:LIGHT BEAM BLOCKED → LOW
34(15) V RES-SEN 5 11 V 5 OPTION AREA
33(14) V OPS-SEN 6 10 V 6 (MIRROR CARRIAGE TYPE)
32(13) V RD-SEN 7 9 V 7
31(12) V VCC 8 8 V 8 021-50030
30(11) V GND 9 7 V 9
29(10) V ADF-OB 10 6 V 10
28(9) V ADF-B 11 5 V 11
27(8) V ADF-OA 12 4 V 12
26(7) V ADF-A 13 3 V 13
25(6) V 24V 14 2 V 14
24(5) V 24V 15 1 V 15
23(4)
22(3)
21(2) 021-51043
20(1)
021-51044

SYSTEM−PCB
021-50500
DESCRIPTION OF PCBS
CC-SUB PCB CC-MAIN PCB
A1
AMP AMP JST KEY/CARD COUNTER
JAC15S CN3
CN210 1-353908-7 1-353908-7
FGND 01 112-00001
CN83 CN81 01
GND 01 17 01 01 01
SGND 02
GND CN1 02
GND 02 16 02 01 +5V 03
02 02 03 CARD
03 03 GCLK 02
15 03 03 /RDT 04 04
CC-CLK GND READER
14 04 03 05
CC-LST 04 04 04 /RCL 05
/CNTSET 04
CC-DAT 05 13 05 05 05 /CLD 06 06
/CNTOP 05
CN215 CAD-RQ 06 12 06 06 06
N.C 07 /CRDRQ 06
11 07 07 07
/G'DATA CN2
N.C 08 10 08 07 CN102
08 CN1 08
11)OPTIONS

09 09 /MSTRCP 08 +5V A01 A01 CC-KEY PCB


CUNT-OP 09 09 09
/LST 09 +5V A02
CUNT-SET 10 08 10 10 10 A02
/CP 10 P14
MASTER-CUNT 11 07 11 11 11 A03 A03
06 /CRDACK 11 P15 A04
TOTAL-CUNT 12 12 12 12 A04
13 05 13 /TXD 12 P16 A05
CAD-ACK 13 13 A05
14 04 14 /RXD 13 P17 A06 A06
LCD
DETAIL 5V 14 GND 14 CN101
15 03 15 14 PA0 A07 A07
5V 15 GND 15 01
02 15 PA1 A08 DB7 01
16 N.C 16 16 A08 02
CONNECT CHECK N.C DB6 02
DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

B30 17 01 N.C 17 16 PA2 A09 A09


GND 17 03
+5V 17 PA3 DB5 03
18 A10 A10 04
+5V 18 GND DB4 04
CN2 CN1 CN2 B01 B01 05
CN82 CN5 GND B02 N.C 05
112-51002 01 B02 N.C 06
2-353293-0 112-51001 +5V 01 06
GND 1 02 P22 B03 B03 N.C 07
GND 1 +5V

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2 20 1 02 P21 07
   N.C /BZER 03 B04 B04 N.C 08
GND 2 CN213 03 08
3 3 GND 04 P20 B05 B05
GND COMENB 04 E 09
4 PE0 B06 B06 09
  CMD− GND 05 10
PWRENB 4 05 R/W 10
CRRDY 5 1 20 FG 06 PE1 B07 B07 11
PSTS 5 06 RS 11
STATUS− 6 FG 07 PE2 B08 B08 12
PCMD 6 021-51052 07 V0 12
7 7 PE3 B09 B09
STRDY− 13
8 PCRRDY N.C B10 +5V 13
RHE− B10 GND 14
PSTRDY 8 14

N.C N.C 9 HIF3BA-40D-2.54R
RDCLK− 10 RINC2
   N.C 10
N.C 11
N.C 11 40 1
BUSY− 12
   N.C 12
13
DCLK− N.C 13
HE− 14 14 CN214 HOLDING SW
VCC(CI)
HSYNK− 15
VCC(CI)15
VSYNK− 16
GDTEN9 16 1 40
N.C 17
LED−RED 17
SDATA− 18 021-51049 5480-07AX
LED−GRN 18
MOT
MOT

XHP12
19 19 TCP586-71-5201 MOLEX
N.C JST
FEED/CUT MOTOR

20 GND(CI)
PDATA− 20 01 HOSIDEN
GND(CI) GND PCB CONNECTION
CONNECT SIGNAL
21 CN2 1-172677-0
1-353293-9*2 3-353308-8 02 CABLE AMP
22 N.C CN201
N.C 03 CLUSTER A 01 01 GND 01
23 DETAIL
GND

PWR 04 02 02 CLUSTER B 02 01
CLUSTER B
send(-),cut(+)
send(+),cut(-)

CMD 24
CN209 05 N.C 03 03 CLUSTER A 03 CN202 02
25
CRRDY− CN207 06 5V 04 04 5V 04 03
26
STATUS 07 GND 05 05 GND 05
27
STRDY 08 24VG 06 24VG 06

[ 19 − 12 ]
021-51044 021-51043 06 01
28
RHE 09 N.C N.C 07 07 N.C 07
29 1-173977-5 1-353293-5 CN203 02
N.C 15 01 15 01 10 N.C N.C 08 08
30 38(19) CN204
RDCLK 14 02 GND 11 N.C 09
14 02 37(18) *ADF-EXIT
13 03
stamp
stamp

N.C 31 13 03 36(17) ADF-SEN 12 N.C 10


12 04 12 04 35(16) OUT-SEN
CN1
BUSY 32
11 05 11 05 34(15) RES-SEN 172486-2
DCLK 33 10 06 021-51064 CN205
34 10 06 33(14) AMP
HE 09 *PS-SEN
07 09 07 32(13)
35 RD-SEN
HSYNK 08 08 08 08 31(12) VCC
solenoid(-)

36
solenoid(+)

VSYNK 07 09 07 09 30(11)
37 06 GND
N.C 10 06 10 29(10)
05 11 ADF-*B
38 05 11 28(9)
SDATA 04 12 ADF-B JUNCTION PCB
39 04 12 27(8) ADF-*A
N.C 03 13 03 13 26(7)
TC200-PCB
PDATA 40 02 14 ADF-A
02 14 25(6) ST SORTER
24V MAIN SW MANUAL SW
01 15 01 15 24(5)
24V
23(4)
01 22(3)
02 SYSTEM-PCB 017-00034
21(2)
03
SOL

20(1) 021-50500
04
51065-0600
STAMP SOLENOID

05
06 01

ADF READ PULSE MOTOR B 02
A 03 01
A 04 02
≠Q4V 05
CN1 03
≠Q4V 06
ORIGINAL IN SENSOR 03 04
≠TV 01 05
02
01 06
RDSPT 02
07
ADF ORIGINAL DETECTION RDSLD 03 CN2
SENSOR(PAPER DETECT;L
08
;L ) 03 ≠TV 04 09
02 SGND 05
10
01 EPSEN 06
11
03 ≠TV 07 12
02 SGND 08 CN3 13
01 RGSEN 09 14
ADF ORIGINAL REGISTRATION ≠TV 10
SENSOR(PAPER DETECT;H;H ) 03 SGND 11
02 LEVSEN12
01 51065-1400
1-173977-2
ORIGINAL OUT SENSOR
(PAPER DETECT;H
;H ) ADF JUNCTION PCB
021-50512
2.LOCATION OF PCBS

SUB-SW-PCB

PANEL CONTROL PCB

MAIN-SW-PCB

MOTOR CONTROL PCB

INK SENSOR PCB

PRINT DRUM CONTROL


PCB

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

RELAY PCB

ADF-PCB

SYSTEM PCB

RISORINC2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

3.PCB FUNCTION DETAIL

PCB NAME FUNCTION MODEL


SYSTEM PCB OVERALL CONTROL *1

PSUNIT(POWER SUPPLY SUPPLY ALL VOLTAGES *1


UNIT),PSUNIT 200

DRIVE PCB CONTROL EACH MOTOR *1

PDA ADF(ADF PCB) DRIVE FUNCTION OF ADF UNIT *1

PANEL CONTROL PCB ENTER FUNCTION KEY,CONTROL DISPLAY *1

MAIN SW PCB ENTER NUMERAL KEY *1

SUB SW PCB ENTER SUB PANEL FUNCTION KEY *1

DRM PCB;BK, JUNCTION OF SENSORS ON DRUM PCB *1


DRM PCB;CL

RELAY PCB CONTROL RISORINC2 *1

POWER SUPPLY UNIT SUPPLY VOLTAGE FOR RISORINC2 *1


;SC3K

RINC2PCB;64MB CONTROL COMPUTER INTERFACE *1


FUNCTION

*1:RN2000,RN2030,RN2050,RN2080,RN2100,RN2130,RN2150,RN2180

*2:RN2100,RN2130,RN2150,RN2180

[ 19 − 14 ]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

4.SYSTEM PCB

CN207 CN208 CN212


CN206

CN202 CN211
CN209

EP-
BT1 ROM SW1

CN210

CN214
CN201

CN205 CN204 CN203


CN213

SW1:FREE ROTATION
BT1:BATTERY(CR2450)

[ 19 − 15 ]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

5.POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CN107 CN108 VR301:TPH THERMAL POWER


F6
ADJUSTMENT NORMAL
CN105 VR302:TPH THERMAL POWER
F3 CN 104 CN 105
ADJUSTMENT FINE
F4
F1:FUSE 125V 10A
F2 VR 301 VR 302 F2:FUSE 125V 3.15A
F3:FUSE 125V 3.15A
F5
F4:FUSE 125V 3.15A
F5:FUSE 125V 8A
F6:FUSE 125V 3.15A

F1

CN 102

CN 101

[ 19 − 16 ]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

POWER SUPPLY UNIT FUSE CHART


FUSE NO. SYSTEM PHENOMENON•^CONNECTED PARTS

F1 MAIN NO POWER
125V 10A

F2 +24VA LOCK SOLENOID TOTAL COUNTER MASTER COUNTER


125V 3.15A PRESSURE SOLENOID PRINT POSITIONING PULSE MOTOR
PRESSURE CONTROL MOTOR INKING MOTOR

F3 +24VB
125V 3.15A FLAT BED READ PULSE MOTOR ADF READ PULSE MOTOR
WRITE PULSE MOTOR THERMAL PRESSURE MOTOR PAPER
FEED CRUTCH PAPER EJECTION MOTOR CUTTER MOTOR LOAD
PULSE MOTOR
MASTER COMPRESSION MOTOR•EMASTER REMOVAL MOTOR
ELEVATOR MOTOR CLAMP MOTOR

F4 +24VG
125V 3.15A OPTIONS

F5 +24VM
125V 8A MAIN MOTOR

F6 +24VC
125V 3.15A SEPARATION FAN SUCTION FAN

[ 19 − 17 ]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

6.DRIVE PCB

SW1:FREE ROTATION
CN407
CN409

CN408
CN404

CN406
CN402

CN405

SW1
CN401

CN403

[ 19 − 18 ]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

7.PANEL CONTROL PCB

VR1:FOR ADJUST
CN 302 CN 301
LCD CONTRAST
CN 304

VR 1
CN
307

CN 303
CN 305

CN 306

[ 19 − 19 ]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

8.PRINT DRUM CONTROL PCB

BLACK
SW1-5:INK CARTRIDGE SET
SENSOR (BACK OF PCB)
CN 503 CN 502 CN 504

SW 1 SW 2 SW 4

SW 3 SW 5

CN 501

COLOR

SW1-5:INK CARTRIDGE SET


SENSOR (BACK OF PCB)
CN 503 CN 502 CN 504

SW 1

SW 2

SW 3

CN 501

[ 19 − 20 ]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

9.ADF PCB

LED1:READ SENSOR DETECT


CN 2
LED1 VR1:READ SENSOR ADJUST SENSITIVITY

VR 1
CN 1

CN 3

[ 19 − 21 ]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like